Toshiba Copier FC 22 User Manual

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDINGTHE INSTALLATION  
AND SERVICE FOR THE COPIER FC-22  
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.  
1. Transportation/Installation  
When transporting/installing the copier, move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers.  
The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 200 kg (441 lb), therefore pay full attention  
when handling it.  
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V/20A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) or more for  
its power source.  
The copier must be grounded for safety.  
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.  
Select a suitable place for installation.  
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.  
Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone.  
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of  
80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.  
2. Service of Machines  
Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.  
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the  
damp heater and their periphery.  
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, the transfer belt and the high-  
voltage transformer.  
Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.  
When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections  
and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.  
Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.  
Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.  
Avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.  
Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.  
3. Main Service Parts for Safety  
The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly impor-  
tant for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.  
4. Cautionary Labels  
During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the  
power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on  
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the copier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS  
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
(PM)  
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING  
& HANDLING SUPPLIES  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING  
5. FIRMWARE UPDATING  
6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION  
DIAGRAMS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS ............................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.1 Error Code List ....................................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2 Self Diagnostic Mode ............................................................................................................. 1-6  
1.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ...................................................................................... 1-8  
1.2.2 Output check (Test mode 03) ................................................................................... 1-15  
1.2.3 Test print mode (04).................................................................................................. 1-19  
1.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) .............................................................................................. 1-20  
1.2.5 Setting mode (08) ..................................................................................................... 1-33  
1.2.6 Registering/changing ID codes................................................................................. 1-43  
1.3 Adjustment Order (Copy Image Related Adjustment)............................................................ 1-45  
1.4 Automatic Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Circuit..................................................................... 1-46  
1.5 Automatic Initialization of Image Quality Control ................................................................... 1-50  
1.6 Copy Image Dimensional Adjustment .................................................................................... 1-51  
1.6.1 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the main registration roller ................................. 1-53  
1.6.2 Feed motor speed adjustment .................................................................................. 1-54  
1.6.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 1-55  
1.6.4 Scanner related adjustment...................................................................................... 1-58  
1.7 Automatic Adjustment of Gamma Correction......................................................................... 1-66  
1.8 Density Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 1-68  
1.9 Color Balance Adjustment...................................................................................................... 1-69  
1.10 Offset Amount for Processing Background ............................................................................ 1-70  
1.11 Judgment Threshold for ACS ................................................................................................. 1-71  
1.12 AI Mode Setting ..................................................................................................................... 1-72  
1.13 Sharpness Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 1-73  
1.14 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .......................................................................................... 1-74  
1.14.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 1-74  
1.14.2 Settings after replacing main high-voltage transformers .......................................... 1-74  
1.14.3 Settings after replacing transfer transformer ............................................................ 1-75  
1.15 Adjusting Doctor-to-Sleeve Gap ............................................................................................ 1-76  
1.16 Adjusting the Scanner Section............................................................................................... 1-77  
1.16.1 Adjusting the carriage ............................................................................................... 1-77  
1.16.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................... 1-80  
1.17 Adjusting the Cassette for Sidewise Deviation ...................................................................... 1-83  
1.18 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)......................................................................................... 1-84  
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) ......................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1 Types of Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................................... 2-1  
2.2 Maintenance to be Performed Every 30,000, 60,000, 90,000 and 120,000 Copies .............. 2-2  
2.3 Preventive Maintenance Checklist ......................................................................................... 2-2  
2.4 PM Kit .................................................................................................................................... 2-12  
FC-22 CONTENTS  
I
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5 List of Adjustment Tools ......................................................................................................... 2-13  
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES ...................................................... 3-1  
3.1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies ........................................................................... 3-1  
3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Photoconductive Drum .......................................................... 3-1  
3.3 Checking and Cleaning of the Drum Cleaning Blade and Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade ....... 3-2  
3.4 Checking and Replacing the Oil Roller and Cleaning Roller of Fuser Section ...................... 3-3  
3.5 Checking and Cleaning of the Fuser Rollers ......................................................................... 3-3  
3.6 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt ............................................................................. 3-4  
3.7 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Roller .......................................................................... 3-4  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................................................ 4-1  
4.1 Troubleshooting Based on Error Code ................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.1 Paper transport jam inside the copier ....................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.2 Paper feeding jam..................................................................................................... 4-3  
4.1.3 Paper transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor after feeding) ....... 4-5  
4.1.4 Cover open jam ........................................................................................................ 4-6  
4.1.5 Paper jam in ADU and reversing area ...................................................................... 4-8  
4.1.6 Original jam in the RADF .......................................................................................... 4-10  
4.1.7 Paper jam in the sorter ............................................................................................. 4-12  
4.1.8 Special sheet jam ..................................................................................................... 4-15  
4.1.9 Drive system related service call .............................................................................. 4-16  
4.1.10 Paper feeding system related service call ................................................................ 4-20  
4.1.11 Scanner related service call ..................................................................................... 4-23  
4.1.12 Copy process related service call ............................................................................. 4-25  
4.1.13 Fuser unit related service call ................................................................................... 4-30  
4.1.14 Communications related service call ........................................................................ 4-33  
4.1.15 ADF related service call............................................................................................ 4-36  
4.1.16 Other service calls .................................................................................................... 4-37  
4.1.17 Laser optical unit related service call........................................................................ 4-38  
4.1.18 Sorter related service call ......................................................................................... 4-40  
4.1.19 Image quality related service call ............................................................................. 4-45  
4.1.20 Options related service call ...................................................................................... 4-52  
4.1.21 Image processing options related service call.......................................................... 4-53  
4.2 Troubleshooting of Image....................................................................................................... 4-54  
5. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................................. 5-1  
5.1 [3] [9] Mode Operation ........................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.1.2 Preparation of PC ..................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.1.3 Firmware update operation....................................................................................... 5-4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
II  
FC-22 CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.4 Screen details ........................................................................................................... 5-10  
5.2 Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC ..................................................... 5-14  
5.2.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 5-14  
5.2.2 System configuration ................................................................................................ 5-14  
5.2.3 Preparation of PC to use a network.......................................................................... 5-15  
5.2.4 Installation of FTP server.......................................................................................... 5-25  
6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .......................................................................... 6-1  
6.1 AC Wire Harness ................................................................................................................... 6-1  
6.2 DC Wire Harness .......................................................................................................... Appendix  
FC-22 CONTENTS  
III  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In this manual, colors are sometimes described using abbreviations as listed below:  
Yellow :Y  
Magenta : M  
Cyan : C  
Black : K  
1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS  
1.1 Error Code List  
While the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL SERVICE” symbol is flashing, pressing the [CLEAR] key and  
the [8] key on the digital keys at the same time shows one of the following error codes on the copy-  
quantity indicator as long as those keys are pressed.  
Classification  
Error code  
E01  
E02  
E03  
EB7  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
E16  
E19  
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E45  
E46  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E54  
Content  
Paper leading edge not reaching the exit sensor  
Paper trailing edge not passing the exit sensor  
Paper remaining inside the copier at power ON  
Restart time out error  
Paper transport jam inside the copier  
Paper feeding jam  
Paper misfeed from the ADU  
Paper misfeed from the bypass  
Paper misfeed from the 1st cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 2nd cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 3rd cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 4th cassette  
Paper misfeed from the LCF  
Paper transport jam  
Paper transport jam from the LCF  
Paper transport jam from the 1st cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 2nd cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 3rd cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 4th cassette  
Front cover opened during copying  
Side door opened during copying  
(Paper not reaching the registration  
sensor after feeding)  
Cover open jam  
ADU unit pulled out during copying  
LCF jam access cover opened during copying  
Bypass unit opened during copying  
Paper not reaching the ADU  
Paper jam in ADU and reversing  
area  
Paper not restarting from the ADU stack  
Paper not reaching the ADU path sensor  
ADU paper transport jam  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
E71  
E72  
E73  
E75  
E79  
Content  
Original not reaching the aligning sensor  
Original not reaching the exit sensor  
Original not passing the exit sensor  
Second original not reaching the aligning sensor in 2-in-1 mode  
Original pre-feeding jam  
Original jam in the ADF  
Paper jam in the sorter  
EA1  
EA2  
EA3  
EA4  
EA5  
EA6  
EA8  
EA9  
EAA  
EAB  
EAC  
EC2  
EC3  
C05  
C09  
C0A  
C0B  
C0C  
C0D  
C0E  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C18  
C27  
C28  
C29  
Paper transport delay jam  
Paper transport stop jam  
Paper remaining on the sorter transport path at power on  
Sorter front door opened during copying  
Staple jam  
Paper jam in the sorter  
Finisher/sorter early-arrival jam (P30) (internal)  
Finisher saddle staple jam  
Finisher saddle door open  
Finisher saddle power ON jam  
Finisher saddle delivery delay  
Finisher saddle delivery failure  
Special sheet jam  
OHP sheets used except from bypass and 2nd cassette  
OHP sheet used in non-OHP mode  
ADU motor rotation abnormal  
Drive system related service call  
Paper feeding system related  
Black developer motor rotation abnormal  
Color developer motor rotation abnormal  
Drum motor K rotation abnormal  
service call  
Drum motor C rotation abnormal  
Drum motor M rotation abnormal  
Drum motor Y rotation abnormal  
ADU paper side guide function abnormal  
ADU paper end guide function abnormal  
1st cassette tray function abnormal  
2nd cassette tray function abnormal  
3rd cassette tray function abnormal  
4th cassette tray function abnormal  
LCF tray function abnormal  
Scanner related service call  
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a fixed time  
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a fixed time  
Exposure lamp disconnection detected  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
C31  
Content  
Used toner transport motor rotation abnormal  
Developer removal shutter function abnormal  
Transfer belt unit contact/release function abnormal  
Transfer belt moter rotation abnormal  
Auto toner initializing error (K)  
Copy process related service call  
C33  
C35  
C37  
C38  
C39  
Auto toner initializing error (C)  
C3A  
C3B  
C3C  
C3D  
C3E  
C3F  
Auto toner initializing error (M)  
Auto toner initializing error (Y)  
Main charger wire abnormal (K)  
Main charger wire abnormal (C)  
Main charger wire abnormal (M)  
Main charger wire abnormal (Y)  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 2 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
C41  
Content  
Thermistor or heater abnormal when warming-up is started  
Thermistor abnormal after the copier becomes ready  
Thermistor abnormal during warming-up after abnormality  
judgment  
Fuser unit related service call  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C46  
C47  
Heater abnormal during warming-up after abnormality  
judgment  
Heater abnormal (low temperature) after the copier has  
become ready  
Rear thermistor abnormal after the copier has become  
ready  
C48  
C7  
Heater abnormal (high temperature)  
Error C7  
Communications related service call  
C57  
C5A  
C5B  
C5C  
C72  
C73  
C74  
C94  
C9A  
C9E  
CA1  
CA2  
CD1  
CD2  
CD3  
CD4  
Communications error between Main-CPU and Sorter-CPU  
Communications error between Main-CPU and printer controller  
Main-CPU signal transmission error to IMC-CPU  
Main-CPU signal reception error from IMC-CPU  
Error of aligning sensor automatic adjustment  
EEPROM initializing error  
ADF related service call  
Other service calls  
Error of paper exit sensor automatic adjustment  
Main-CPU abnormal  
Main memory abnormal  
IMC board connection abnormal  
Polygonal motor rotation abnormal  
H-SYNC abnormal  
Laser optical unit related service call  
Laser calibration error (K)  
Laser calibration error (C)  
Laser calibration error (M)  
Laser calibration error (Y)  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 3  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
CB1  
CB2  
CB3  
CB4  
CB5  
CB6  
CB7  
CB8  
CB9  
CBA  
CBB  
CBC  
CBD  
CBE  
CBF  
CC0  
CC2  
CC1  
CC3  
CC4  
CC5  
CCA  
CCC  
CE1  
CE2  
CE3  
CE4  
CE5  
CF1  
Content  
Sorter related service call  
Delivery motor abnormal  
Paper exit motor abnormal  
Tray-up motor abnormal  
Alignment motor abnormal  
Staple motor abnormal  
Staple unit shift motor abnormal  
Stack detection sensor abnormal  
Backup RAM data abnormal  
Saddle push motor abnormal  
Saddle outer staple motor abnormal  
Saddle inner staple motor abnormal  
Saddle alignment motor abnormal  
Saddle guide motor abnormal  
Saddle folding motor abnormal  
Saddle positioning plate motor abnormal  
Sensor connector connection abnormal  
Micro-switch abnormal  
Sorter related service call  
Transport motor rotation abnormal  
Bin shift motor rotation abnormal  
Guide bar swing motor rotation abnormal  
Staple-unit swing motor rotation abnormal  
Automatic adjustment error of bin inside paper sensor  
No power being supplied  
Image quality related service call  
Image quality sensor abnormal (OFF level)  
Image quality sensor abnormal (no pattern level)  
Abnormal image caused by poor charger  
Image quality control test pattern abnormal  
Temperature/humidity sensor upper-limit abnormal  
Color registation control abnormal  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 3 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
F07  
Content  
Options related service call  
Communications error between System-CPU and Main-CPU  
Communications error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU  
Communications error between System-CPU and AI-board  
during pre-scanning  
F11  
Image processing options related  
service call  
F51  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Error history>>  
Under code 253 in the setting mode (08), the latest eight groups of error data will be displayed.  
Display example  
EA1  
99 08 26 17 57 32  
YY MM DD HH MM SS  
12 digits  
64  
64  
236210000000  
ABCDEFHIJLOP  
12 digits  
Error code  
3 digits  
MMM  
3 digits  
NNN  
3 digits  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Paper source  
0:Not fixed 1:Bypass feed 2:LCF 3:1st 4:2nd 5:3rd 6:4th 7:ADU feed  
Paper size code  
0:A5/ST 1:A5-R 2:ST-R 3:LT 4:A4 5:B5-R 6:LT-R 7:A4-R 8:OTHER/UNIV 9:B5  
A:FOL/COM B:LG C:B4 D:LD E:A3 Z:Not selected  
Sort mode  
0:Not selected 1:Group 2:Sort 6:Staple sort  
DF mode  
0:Unused 1:AUTO FEED (SADF) 2:STACK FEED  
APS/AMS mode  
0:Not selected 1:APS 2:AMS  
Duplex mode  
0:Not selected 1:BOOK 2:Two-sided/Single-sided 4:Two-sided/Duplexed 8:Single-sided/Duplexed  
G
H
Unused  
Binding space  
0:Unused 1:BOOK 2:LEFT 4:RIGHT  
I
Editing  
0:Unused 1:Masking 2:Trimming 3:Mirror image 4:Negative/Positive  
J
Edge erase/Dual-page  
0:Unused 1:Edge erase 2:Dual-page 3:Edge erase & Dual-page  
K
L
Unused  
Function  
0:Copying 1:Unused (Extended copying) 2:Unused (Fax input) 3:Unused (Fax printing)  
4:Printing 5:Unused (DSS)  
MMM Primary-scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M  
NNN  
O
Secondary-scanning reproduction ration (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N  
Color mode  
0:Auto color 1:Full color 2:Black 3:Monocolor  
P
AI board  
0:Unused 1:Used  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 5  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2 Self Diagnostic Mode  
Mode  
Input method  
Meaning  
Clearing  
Whole control panel light-  
ing mode  
[0]+[1]+[POWER]  
All control-panel LEDs are lit, [C] or [POWER]  
and all LCD pixels are turned  
on/off repeatedly.  
OFF/ON  
Test mode  
[0]+[3]+[POWER]  
Input/output signals are [POWER] OFF/ON  
checked  
Test print mode  
Adjustment mode  
Setting mode  
[0]+[4]+[POWER]  
[0]+[5]+[POWER]  
[0]+[8]+[POWER]  
A test pattern print is made.  
Adjustment of various items  
Setting of various items  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
[POWER] OFF/ON  
Note: Input method for various modes:  
While pressing simultaneously the two digital keys corresponding to the mode you want to set  
(for example, [0] and [5]), turn on the main switch [POWER].  
<Operation procedure>  
CLEAR  
(Exit)  
POWER OFF/ON  
or  
0
1
START  
START  
CLEAR  
(Exit)  
(All control-panel LEDs light)  
(Check Key)  
Power  
• Whole control-panel lighting mode (01) :  
Notes: 1. During the “Check keys” mode, [CLEAR] alone can do.  
During the “Whole control-panel lighting mode”, [CLEAR] can clear the mode.  
2. Check keys : Any key with LED (when it is pressed, the LED goes out.)  
Any key without LED (When it is pressed, an indication is made in the message area.)  
Test mode (03)  
:Refer to Sec. 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 for test modes.  
: Refer to Sec. 1.2.3 for test print modes.  
Test print mode (04)  
• Adjustment mode (05) : Refer to Sec. 1.2.4 for adjustment modes.  
• Setting mode (08) : Refer to Sec. 1.2.5 for setting modes.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 6  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Power] ON  
[0][3] [0][5]  
Normal  
[0][1]  
*1  
[0][8]  
[0][4]  
[CLEAR]  
All the displays on  
the control panel lit  
Warming up  
Standby  
Test mode Adjustment mode Setting mode  
Test print mode  
[Power] OFF/ON  
*2  
Hand over to user  
Transition diagram of self-diagnostic mode conditions  
*1 : During the “Whole control-panel lighting mode”, copying is not possible. But after pressing [CLEAR]  
to make the copier ready, you can make copies.  
*2 : After having used the self-diagnostic mode, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the power before  
returning the copier to the customer.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 7  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 1 Input check (Test mode 03)  
The status of each item can be checked by setting ON/OFF of each [FULL COLOR], [AUTO COLOR],  
[ENERGY SAVER], and then pressing each of the corresponding digital key in this test mode 03.  
Note: When icon is displayed with black letter on white background, it indicates the value is 0, while  
in reverse black and white, it indicates the value is 1.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
0: Switch is ON  
A
B
C
Paper size switch 0 (1st cassette : Lower)  
Paper size switch 1 (1st cassette : Middle lower)  
Paper size switch 2 (1st cassette : Middle upper)  
Paper size switch 3 (1st cassette : Upper)  
Cassette paper empty sensor (1st cassette)  
Cassette tray-up limit sensor (1st cassette)  
Cassette-feed jam sensor (1st cassette)  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
1: No paper  
1
D
E
F
1: Tray is upper limit  
1: Paper exist  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Paper size switch 0 (2nd cassette : Lower)  
Paper size switch 1 (2nd cassette : Middle lower)  
Paper size switch 2 (2nd cassette : Middle upper)  
Paper size switch 3 (2nd cassette : Upper)  
Cassette paper empty sensor (2nd cassette)  
Cassette tray-up limit sensor (2nd cassette)  
Cassette-feed jam sensor (2nd cassette)  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
1: No paper  
2
3
4
1: Tray is upper limit  
1: Paper exist  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Paper size switch 0 (3rd cassette : Lower)  
Paper size switch 1 (3rd cassette : Middle lower)  
Paper size switch 2 (3rd cassette : Middle upper)  
Paper size switch 3 (3rd cassette : Upper)  
Cassette paper empty sensor (3rd cassette)  
Cassette tray-up limit sensor (3rd cassette)  
Cassette-feed jam sensor (3rd cassette)  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
1: No paper  
1: Tray is upper limit  
1: Paper exist  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Paper size switch 0 (4th cassette : Lower)  
Paper size switch 1 (4th cassette : Middle lower)  
Paper size switch 2 (4th cassette : Middle upper)  
Paper size switch 3 (4th cassette : Upper)  
Cassette paper empty sensor (4th cassette)  
Cassette tray-up limit sensor (4th cassette)  
Cassette-feed jam sensor (4th cassette)  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
0: Switch is ON  
1: No paper  
1: Tray is upper limit  
1: Paper exists  
G
H
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 8  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Bypass paper-width sensor 0  
Bypass paper-width sensor 1  
Bypass paper-width sensor 2  
Bypass paper-width size sensor 3  
Bypass paper sensor  
Condition  
Refer to Table 1.  
A
B
C
Refer to Table 1.  
Refer to Table 1.  
Refer to Table 1.  
1: No paper  
D
5
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Bypass unit open/close switch  
Side door open/close switch  
Bypass unit is installed or not  
LCF paper empty sensor  
LCF lower-limit sensor  
1: Unit is open  
1: Side door is open  
0: Unit is installed  
1: No paper  
1: Tray limit (lower)  
1: Tray limit (upper)  
0: Switch is ON  
1: Door is open  
0: LCF is installed  
0: Normal rotation  
LCF tray-up sensor  
LCF tray-down switch  
6
E
F
LCF paper supply door switch  
LCF is installed or not  
G
ADU motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by 03 Output mode)  
ADU unit is installed or not  
ADU paper jam switch  
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
0: ADU unit is installed  
1: Paper exist  
ADU paper empty switch  
ADU end switch  
0: No paper  
1: End guide is positioned at home position  
1: Side guide is positioned at home position  
ADU side switch  
7
Total counter is installed or not  
Key copy counter is installed or not  
0: Total counter is installed  
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
0: Key copy counter is installed  
Developer removal shutter home position sensor  
0: Shatter is closed  
0: Unit is installed  
0: Normal rotation  
0: Normal rotation  
Transfer belt unit is installed or not  
Color developer motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by 03 Output mode)  
Black developer motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by 03 Output mode)  
Transfer belt limit switch  
Transfer belt home position switch  
8
F
G
H
0: Transfer belt is black mode position  
0: Transfer belt is color mode position  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 9  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
External printer controller power ON/OFF  
0: Controller power ON  
D
Front-cover switch  
1: Front cover is open  
9
E
OHP center sensor  
0: Opaque paper is installed  
F
G
H
A
B
C
Registration sensor  
1: Paper exist  
0: Board installed  
1: Paper exist  
IPC-IF board (Sorter installation kit) is installed or not  
ADU path sensor  
Exit sensor  
1: Paper exist  
D
Paper-exit unit open/close switch  
1: Paper-exit unit is open  
1: Used toner full  
0
E
Toner bag limit sensor  
F
G
H
Table 1. Relation between bypass paper-width sensor status and paper width size.  
Bypass paper-width sensor  
Paper-width size  
3
0
1
1
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
A3/LD  
A4-R/LT-R  
A5-R/ST-R  
Card size  
B4-R/LG  
B5-R  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 10  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: ON  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
D
1
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
Developer cartridge Y is installed or not  
0: Cartirdge is installed  
0: Cartirdge is installed  
0: Cartirdge is installed  
0: Cartirdge is installed  
0: Unit is installed  
Developer cartridge M is installed or not  
Developer cartridge C is installed or not  
D
Developer cartridge K is installed or not  
2
E
Processing unit is installed or not  
F
G
H
A
B
C
Fuser unit is installed or not  
0: Unit is installed  
Wire cleaner home position switch Y  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is positioned at limit position.  
Wire cleaner home position switch M  
Wire cleaner home position switch C  
D
Wire cleaner home position switch K  
3
E
Wire cleaner limit switch Y  
F
G
H
A
B
C
Wire cleaner limit switch M  
Wire cleaner limit switch C  
Wire cleaner limit switch K  
D
4
E
F
G
H
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 11  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
D
5
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
6
E
F
G
H
Front cover, paper-exit unit open/close check  
1: Cover/unit open  
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating by 03 Output mode) 0: Normal rotation  
7
8
9
0
Upper fuser roller thermistor (center) check  
Upper fuser roller thermistor (rear) check  
Lower fuser roller thermistor (center) check  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: ON, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Lower fuser roller thermistor (rear) check  
Temperature sensor check  
Humidity sensor check  
Drum thermistor Y check  
Drum thermistor M check  
Drum thermistor C check  
Drum thermistor K check  
Condition  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 12  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: ON, [ENERGY SAVER]key: ON  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
1
2
3
4
5
A
Color registration sensor (front)  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 10 bit.  
Color registration sensor (rear)  
Image quality sensor  
ADF aligning sensor  
1: Original exist  
1: Original exist  
1: ADF is open  
1: Original exist  
B
ADF exit sensor  
C
D
E
ADF open/close sensor  
ADF empty sensor  
6
7
8
ADF size sensor 1  
F
G
H
A
ADF size sensor 2  
ADF unit is installed or not  
1: ADF unit is installed  
B
Direct control-panel connection detection  
C
D
E
Connection  
Installation  
F
Carriage home position sensor  
1: Carriage is home position  
1: Platen cover is closed  
G
H
A
Direct control-panel SW-F key (during debugging)  
Platen sensor  
B
C
D
E
APS sensor (APS-R)  
APS sensor (APS-C)  
APS sensor (APS-3)  
APS sensor (APS-2) (for A4 series)  
APS sensor (APS-1)  
Scanner SCM board input 24V check  
Thermistor check  
1: Original exist  
1: Original exist  
1: Original exist  
1: Original exist  
1: Original exist  
Output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
F
G
H
9
0
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 13  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: ON, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Auto-toner sensor Y  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bit.  
Auto-toner sensor M  
Auto-toner sensor C  
Auto-toner sensor K  
<Operation procedure>  
0
3
)
(
START  
FULL COLOR  
ENERGY SAVER  
Digital keys  
(LCD ON)  
AUTO COLOR  
POWER  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Note: After initialization, the copier goes into the test mode.  
Note: When icon is displayed with white letter on black background on the control panel,  
it indicates the value is 1.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 14  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 2 Output check (Test mode 03)  
Output signal status can be checked by inputting the following code according to this test mode 03.  
Code  
Function  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
150 All output OFF  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
3
101  
102  
Drum motor and transfer belt motor rotation with normal running speed ON 151 Code No. 101 function OFF  
Drum motor and transfer belt motor rotation with OHP copying speed (low) ON  
152 Code No. 102 function OFF  
153 Code No. 103 function OFF  
154 Code No. 104 function OFF  
155 Code No. 105 function OFF  
156 Code No. 106 function OFF  
157 Code No. 107 function OFF  
158 Code No. 108 function OFF  
159 Code No. 109 function OFF  
160 Code No. 110 function OFF  
161 Code No. 111 function OFF  
162 Code No. 112 function OFF  
163 Code No. 113 function OFF  
164 Code No. 114 function OFF  
180 Code No. 130 function OFF  
181 Code No. 131 function OFF  
182 Code No. 132 function OFF  
183 Code No. 133 function OFF  
184 Code No. 134 function OFF  
103 Paper feed motor ON  
104 Fuser motor ON  
105 Color developer motor ON  
106 Black developer motor ON  
107 Registration clutch ON  
108 Used-toner transport motor ON  
109 ADU motor ON  
110 Toner motor (Y) ON  
111 Toner motor (M) ON  
112 Toner motor (C) ON  
113 Toner motor (K) ON  
114 Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON  
130 Polygonal motor standby speed ON  
131 Polygonal motor normal speed ON  
132 Image quality sensor LED ON  
133 Color registration sensor LED (front) ON  
134 Color registration sensor LED (rear) ON  
135 Image quality sensor mode switching ON (Black mode) 185  
201 1st cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
Code No. 135 function OFF (Color mode)  
202 2nd cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
203 3rd cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
204 4th cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
205 Feed path clutch ON/OFF  
206 Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF  
207 1st cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
208 2nd cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
209 3rd cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
210 4th cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
211 Paper-exit gate solenoid ON/OFF  
212 Total counter count up  
213 Ozone exhaust fan motor ON/OFF  
214 Fuser exhaust fan motor speed Low/High  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 15  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
215 SIC fan motor speed Low/High  
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
216 Charger wire cleaner drive motor (Y) CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
217 Charger wire cleaner drive motor (M) CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
218 Charger wire cleaner drive motor (C) CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
219 Charger wire cleaner drive motor (K) CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
220 Transfer-belt contact/release motor CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
221 Developer removal shutter open/close motor CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
223 LCF paper-feed motor ON/OFF  
224 LCF tray motor ON/OFF  
225 ADU feed clutch ON/OFF  
226 ADU gate solenoid ON/OFF  
227 ADU side motor ON/OFF  
228 ADU end motor ON/OFF  
235 Main charger (Y) ON/OFF  
236 Main charger (M) ON/OFF  
237 Main charger (C) ON/OFF  
238 Main charger (K) ON/OFF  
239 Developer bias (Y) DC (+) ON/OFF  
240 Developer bias (M) DC (+) ON/OFF  
241 Developer bias (C) DC (+) ON/OFF  
242 Developer bias (K) DC (+) ON/OFF  
243 Developer bias (Y) DC (–) ON/OFF  
244 Developer bias (M) DC (–) ON/OFF  
245 Developer bias (C) DC (–) ON/OFF  
246 Developer bias (K) DC (–) ON/OFF  
247 Developer bias (Y) AC ON/OFF  
248 Developer bias (M) AC ON/OFF  
249 Developer bias (C) AC ON/OFF  
250 Developer bias (K) AC ON/OFF  
251 Cleaning blade bias (Y) AC + DC ON/OFF  
252 Cleaning blade bias (M) AC + DC ON/OFF  
253 Cleaning blade bias (C) AC + DC ON/OFF  
254 Cleaning blade bias (K) AC + DC ON/OFF  
255 Transfer roller bias (Y) ON/OFF  
256 Transfer roller bias (M) ON/OFF  
257 Transfer roller bias (C) ON/OFF  
258 Transfer roller bias (K) ON/OFF  
259 Paper suction charger ON/OFF  
260 Discharge LED (Y) ON/OFF  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 16  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
261 Discharge LED (M) ON/OFF  
262 Discharge LED (C) ON/OFF  
263 Discharge LED (K) ON/OFF  
280 Laser (Y) ON/OFF  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
281 Laser (M) ON/OFF  
282 Laser (C) ON/OFF  
283 Laser (K) ON/OFF  
300 Carriage fan motor rotation when standby (low speed) ON/OFF  
301 Carriage fan motor rotation when running (high speed) ON/OFF  
302 SCM fan motor rotation speed Low/High  
304 Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF  
331 ADF pick-up roller rotation ON/OFF  
332 ADF aligning roller rotation ON/OFF  
333 ADF transport-belt CW rotation ON/OFF  
334 ADF transport-belt CCW rotation ON/OFF  
351 Scan motor (carriage 1 reciprocating)  
352 Document motor (indicator 1 reciprocating)  
353 ADF single-sided original feeding  
354 ADF two-sided original feeding  
355 ADF original exiting  
356 ADF 2 in 1 original feeding  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 17  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Operation procedure>  
Group 1  
0
3
START  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Code)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
Group 2  
0
3
START  
CLEAR  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(One-direction operation)  
POWER  
Group 3  
0
3
START  
START  
CLEAR  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
Group 4  
0
3
START  
START  
CLEAR  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
or  
6 sec. later  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 18  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 3 Test print mode (04)  
In the 04 test print mode, you can print the test patterns matching with each item if you input the  
following codes.  
Code  
11  
Types of test pattern  
Remarks  
Paper size  
A3  
2-pixel modulation pattern for creating γ table  
3-pixel modulation pattern for creating γ table  
1-pixel modulation pattern for checking γ table  
2-pixel modulation pattern for checking γ table  
3-pixel modulation pattern for checking γ table  
Gray 2-pixel modulation pattern for checking γ table  
Gray 3-pixel modulation pattern for checking γ table  
12  
A3  
13  
A3  
14  
A3  
15  
A3  
24  
A3  
25  
A3  
204 Grid pattern (Printer reproduction ratio/Registration  
adjustment pattern)  
Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 5mm  
(same as the adjustment pattern  
by [05] mode [1][SETTINGS])  
A3/LD  
219 6% test pattern  
220 8% test pattern  
None  
230 Gradation check pattern (2 Pixels standard)  
Pattern width: 10mm,  
32 gradation steps  
Pattern width: 10mm,  
32 gradation steps  
A3/LD  
231 Gradation check pattern (3 Pixels standard)  
A3/LD  
234 Half tone  
A3/LD  
A3/LD  
A3  
256 Density check pattern  
291 2-pixel modulation pattern 1 for selecting pulse width  
292 2-pixel modulation pattern 2 for selecting pulse width  
A3  
Note: Full color (YMCK) mode is not available in 230, 231 and 234.  
<Operation procedure>  
0
4
START  
STOP  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Test print operation)  
POWER  
Note: 1. When an error has occurred, it is indicated, but the recovery operation is not performed. So, turn the  
power OFF and then back ON to clear the error.  
2. During test printing, when "Wait adding toner" is displayed, the [STOP] key is disabled.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 19  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 4 Adjustment mode (05)  
In the adjustment mode 05, the following adjustment items can be corrected, changed, or checked.  
*In code No. column, number after hyphen means sub-code.  
Operation  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
procedure  
group  
104 Scanner (secondary scanning) copy length re- 128  
production ratio adjustment.  
1~255 When the value increases by 1, the  
reproduction ratio in the secondary  
scanning direction (vertical paper  
feeding direction) increases by  
approx. 0.1522%.  
1
105 Scanner (secondary scanning) start position 128 85~171 When the value increases by 1, the  
1
1
1
deviation  
image shifts by approx. 0.1213mm  
toward the trailing edge of the pa-  
per.  
106 CCD primary scanning start For regular  
180  
133  
5~251 When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.042mm  
toward the front side of the paper  
(machine).  
position deviation  
copy mode  
108  
For whole-area  
copy mode  
5~251 When you input a value, which is  
47steps (equivalent to2mm)  
smaller than the set value of [106],  
the rear original edge and thefront  
copy edge match (0.042mm/step).  
135 RADF original stop position (single-sided)  
136 RADF original stop position  
8
8
0~15  
0~15  
Changes the position where the  
original stops.When the value in-  
creases by 1, the original stop po-  
sition shifts by 1 mm away from the  
original stopper.  
1
1
(reverse side of two-sided original)  
137 RADF sensor automatic adjustment and  
EPROM Initialization  
By pressing the START key, WAIT  
is displayed while the automatic  
adjustment is performed.  
6
Perform RADF EPROM Initializa-  
tion when EPROM, RADF logic  
PWA or sensors are replaced.  
When the value increases by 1, the  
gap between two originals extend  
by 1 mm.  
142 RADF 2-in-1 gap adjustment  
8
0~15  
1
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 20  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
After filling the developer from the de-  
veloper cartridge (approx. 2.5min.),  
auto-toner sensor output is adjusted  
(approx. 2min.) to set in the range of  
4.00-4.33V. (As the value increases,  
the sensor output increases.)  
200 Automatic filling of developer All (Y, M, C, K)  
201 material and automatic ad- Y  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
5
5
5
5
5
5
202 justment of the auto-toner cir- M  
203 cuit  
C
204  
K
221  
Color (Y, M, C)  
213 Auto toner output value  
0
0~1023 Auto toner output value is displayed. 10  
223  
224  
225  
226  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
130  
130  
130  
125  
120  
120  
120  
116  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
Developer bias DC (–)  
output adjustment  
As the value increases, the transformer  
output increases.The adjustment value  
becomes effective only when the setting  
mode (08-400, 401, 409) is 0 (disabled).  
As the value increases, the transformer  
output increases.The adjustment value  
becomes effective only when the setting  
Main charger grid bias  
output adjustment  
mode (08-400, 401, 409) is 0 (disabled).  
Auto-toner sensor output is  
Automatic adjustment of the All  
auto-toner circuit  
adjusted (approx. 2 min.) to set  
in the range of 4.00~4.33V. (As  
the value increases, the sensor  
output increases.)  
(Without automatic filling of (C, M, Y, K)  
developer material)  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
0~255  
0~255  
Y
M
C
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
K
Color  
(Y, M, C)  
252-0  
252-1  
252-2  
252-3  
253-0  
253-1  
253-2  
253-3  
257-0  
257-1  
257-2  
257-3  
258-0  
258-1  
258-2  
258-3  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
250  
250  
250  
250  
900  
900  
900  
900  
100  
100  
100  
100  
700  
700  
700  
700  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
0~999  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Main charger bias  
Actual output voltage of main  
charger grid bias. After replacing  
the main high-voltage transformer,  
input the value according to the  
supplementary data sheet.  
output voltage 1 (lower)  
Main charger bias  
output voltage 2 (upper)  
Developer bias DC (–)  
output voltage 1 (lower)  
Actual output voltage of developer  
bias. After replacing the main high-  
voltage transformer, input the value  
according to the supplementary  
0~999 data sheet.  
0~999  
Developer bias DC (–)  
output voltage 2 (upper)  
0~999  
0~999  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 21  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
318 Transfer bias  
Full color Normal paper  
mode (Top face)/  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
K
67  
67  
0~255 The bias value of the transfer roller  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
319 output adjustment  
0~255 is set. The higher the value, the  
320  
321  
326  
327  
328  
329  
330  
331  
332  
333  
334  
335  
336  
337  
361  
thick paper  
mode  
1
72  
0~255 larger the transformer output be-  
67  
0~255 comes. The adjustment value be-  
67  
0~255 comes effective only when the set-  
Normal paper  
mode (Re-  
verse face)  
67  
0~255 ting mode (08-400, 401, 409) is 0  
72  
0~255 (disabled).  
0~255  
67  
OHP mode  
61  
0~255  
101  
111  
141  
67  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
Thick paper  
2 mode  
67  
0~255  
72  
0~255  
67  
0~255  
Black  
56  
0~255  
Normal paper mode  
(Top face)/Thick pa-  
per 1 mode  
Normal paper mode  
363  
K
56  
0~255  
1
(Reverse face)  
364  
365  
OHP mode  
K
K
82  
56  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
Thick paper2 mode  
Transfer bias output  
voltage 1 (lower)  
367-0  
367-1  
367-2  
367-3  
368-0  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
589 0~5000 Actual output voltage of transfer  
roller bias.After replacing the trans-  
fer transformer, input the value ac-  
cording to the supplementary data  
sheet.  
589 0~5000  
589 0~5000  
589 0~5000  
3929 0~5000  
3929 0~5000  
3929 0~5000  
4715 0~5000  
Transfer bias output  
368-1 voltage 2 (upper)  
368-2  
368-3  
The bias value of the transfer roller  
is set. The higher the value, the  
larger the transformer output be-  
comes. The adjustment value be-  
comes effective only when the set-  
ting mode (08-400, 401, 409) is 0  
(disabled).  
381 Transfer bias out- Full color Thick paper Y 72  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
382 put adjustment  
3 mode  
M
C
K
K
72  
72  
72  
72  
383  
384  
385  
Black  
Thick paper3 mode  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 22  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
390 Automatic removing of devel- All (Y, M, C, K)  
The developer material in the de-  
veloper unit is removed into the  
toner bag.  
6
6
6
1
391 oper material  
392  
Color (Y, M, C)  
K
Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scan-  
ning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal  
motor rotation speed)  
400  
1222 1209~1235 When the value increases by 1, the  
reproduction ratio in the primary  
scanning direction (horizontal pa-  
per feeding direction) decreases by  
approx.0.082%.(If the values of this  
code 400 is changed, the values of  
code 05-401, 402, 403, 404 and  
474 are optimized.)  
Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary  
scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer  
belt motor rotation speed)  
401  
1355 1327~1382 When the value increases by 1, the  
reproduction ratio in the secondary  
scanning direction (vertical paper  
feeding direction) decreases by  
approx.0.074%.(If the values of this  
code 401 is changed, the values of  
code 05-401, 402, 403, 404 and  
474 are optimized.)  
1
402 Fine adjustment of fuser motor rotation speed 3794 0~65535 When the value increases by 1, the  
rotation speed of fuser motor de-  
1
1
1
6
creases by 0.026%.  
403 Fine adjustment of drum motor rotation speed 1700 0~65535 When the value increases by 1, the  
rotation speed of the drum motors  
(Y,M,C,K) decreases by 0.059%.  
404 Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed 4289 0~65535 When the value increases by 1, the  
rotation speed of the paper feed  
motor decreases by 0.023%.  
406 Feed motor speed adjustment  
The paper transport speed of reg-  
istration roller in relation to the im-  
age printing speed is set at the op-  
timum value. (If the value of this  
code 406 is performed, the value  
of code 05-404 is optimized.)  
Performs the color registration con-  
trol.  
407 Color registration control forced performing  
0
6
1
Correction of fuser motor rotation speed in the  
thick paper 3 mode  
408  
0~20  
In this thick paper 3 mode, when  
the value is increased by 1, the  
fuser motor rotation speed is de-  
creased by 0.026%.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 23  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
160  
Contents  
427 Right margin  
0~255 Printed page right edge void (mar-  
gin) adjustment.When the value in-  
creases by 1, the void in the right  
side of paper feed direction (rear  
side) decreases by approx.  
0.042mm.  
1
428 Bottom margin  
160  
0~255 Printed page trailing edge void  
(margin) adjustment. When the  
value increases by 1mm, the void  
in the trailing edge of paper feed  
direction decreases by approx.  
0.042mm.  
1
Paper alignment  
(paper buckle) at  
the main registra-  
tion roller  
Long size  
Short size  
Long size  
Short size  
Long size  
439  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
449  
450  
451  
452  
1st  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
18  
35  
35  
35  
0
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~40  
0~50  
0~50  
When the value increases by 1,  
the aligning (paper buckle)  
increases by approx. 0.8mm.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
cassette  
2nd  
cassette  
3rd  
*Long size:  
cassette Short size  
4th Long size  
cassette Short size  
Paper length 330 mm and longer  
(A3/LD/A3 wide)  
Short size:  
ADU  
Long size  
Short size  
Paper length 220 mm to 329 mm  
LCF  
Bypass feed  
Thick paper 2 mode  
Thick paper 3 mode  
461 Color registration status display  
0~255 The value ofY (0) shows the status 10  
of color registration sensor error. 0  
or 16 or above: Normal  
1-14: Data abnormal (sensor normal)  
15: Color registration pattern reading error  
Primary-scanning data write start position  
adjustment  
470  
474  
K
100  
0~255 When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.042mm  
toward the right side of paper feed  
direction.  
1
Secondary-scanning data write start position ad-  
justment (Printer and Test print mode)  
8
1~15  
When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.6mm to-  
ward the leading edge of paper feed  
direction.  
1
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 24  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
482 Primary-scanning reproduction ratio (scanner) 127 112~142 When the value increases by 1, the  
1
reproduction ratio of the primary  
scanning direction (paper feeding  
in horizontal direction) decreases  
by 0.082%.  
484 Secondary-scanning data 1st cassette  
Y
6
6
0~15  
0~15  
0~15  
0~15  
0~15  
0~15  
0~15  
0~50  
When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.6 mm to-  
ward the trailing edge of paper feed  
direction.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
485 write start position adjust- 2nd cassette Y  
486 ment (Copier)  
3rd cassette  
4th cassette  
Bypass feed  
LCF  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6
487  
488  
489  
490  
7
6
7
ADU  
7
492  
40  
Paper aligning amount adjustable for the main registra-  
tion roller in OHP mode when feeding from the bypass.  
Paperrestartingamountadjustableforthebypass feed  
roller in OHP mode when restarting its roller.  
When the value increases by 1, the  
aligning increases by approx. 0.8 mm.  
Default 9: 68 msec.  
493  
9
0~14  
1
When the value increases by 1, the  
aligning increases by approx. 7 msec.  
500 Modulation mode switching, type A  
501 Modulation mode switching, type B  
502 Modulation mode switching, type C  
503 Modulation mode switching, type D  
504 Highlight processing ON/OFF  
505 Screen angle change (Y)  
506 Screen angle change (M)  
507 Screen angle change (C)  
508 Screen angle change (K)  
509 Modulation data results indication  
511 Density adjustment; density curve input, full color  
512 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
full color  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
8bit*4*4*5  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10  
4
1
513 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
full color  
0
0
0
0
0
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
514 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
full color  
515 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
full color  
516 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
full color  
517 Density adjustment; density curve input,  
monochrome  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 25  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
0
Contents  
518 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
monochrome  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
519 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
monochrome  
0
0
0
0
520 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
monochrome  
521 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
monochrome  
522 Density adjustment; density curve selection,  
monochrome  
523 Color mode black text γ curve set selection  
524 Color mode black text γ curve set selection  
525 Color mode black text γ curve set selection  
526 Monochrome mode black text γ curve set  
selection  
0
0
0
0
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
527 Monochrome mode black text γ curve set  
selection  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
528 Monochrome mode black text γ curve set  
selection  
529 Monitor patch output ON/OFF switching  
530 Filter coefficient set selection table  
531 Scanner characteristic R for filter selection  
532 Scanner characteristic G for filter selection  
533 Scanner characteristic B for filter selection  
534 Scanner correction color conversion matrix  
selection  
0~255  
1
4
1
1
1
(0~99)*62  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~15  
535 Basic color conversion matrix selection, type A 0~255  
536 Basic color conversion matrix selection, type B 0~255  
537 Basic color conversion matrix selection, type C 0~255  
538 Basic color conversion matrix selection, type D 0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
539 Operation of pre-scan unit only  
540 Operation equivalent to normal copying  
544 Automatic adjustment of scanner correction  
color conversion matrix  
545 Selection of scanner correction color  
conversion matrix type  
0
0:3 x 4 1:3 x 3  
0
546 Indication of scanner correction color  
conversion patch read data  
547 Indication of scanner correction color  
conversion matrix calculation results  
32bit*3*10*9  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 25- 1  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
550  
551  
552  
553  
554  
555  
556  
557  
558  
559  
Full color Text/Photo  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
20  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
"Manual density"  
fine adjustment  
(Center setting)  
When the value increases, images  
made at center density become  
darker.  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
When the value increases, images  
made at the “dark” side become  
darker.  
560 "Manual density" Full color Text/Photo  
561 fine adjustment  
Text  
20  
562 (Darker setting)  
Printed image  
Photo  
20  
563  
564  
565  
566  
567  
568  
569  
20  
Map  
20  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
20  
20  
Printed image  
Photo  
20  
20  
Map  
20  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 25 - 2  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
"Manual density"  
570  
571  
572  
573  
574  
575  
576  
577  
578  
579  
580  
581  
582  
583  
584  
585  
586  
587  
588  
589  
Full color Text/Photo  
20  
20  
0~255 When the value increases, images  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10  
fine adjustment  
(Lighter setting)  
Text  
0~255 made at the “light” side become  
Printed image  
Photo  
20  
0~255 lighter.  
20  
0~255  
Map  
20  
0~255  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
20  
0~255  
20  
0~255  
Printed image  
Photo  
20  
0~255  
20  
0~255  
Map  
20  
0~255  
"Automatic den-  
sity" fine adjust-  
ment  
Full color Text/Photo  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
0~255 When the value increases, images  
Text  
0~255 become darker.  
Printed image  
Photo  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
32bit*3*4  
Map  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
604 Indication of calculation results for color  
conversion matrix (within design) type A  
605 Indication of calculation results for color  
conversion matrix (within design) type B  
606 Indication of calculation results for color  
conversion matrix (within design) type C  
607 Indication of calculation results for color  
conversion matrix (within design) type D  
611 Indication of scanner automatic color  
correction results  
32bit*3*10*9  
32bit*3*10*9  
32bit*3*10*9  
32bit*3*10*9  
0~255  
10  
10  
10  
10  
1
612 For paper size : Maximum value adjustment for 255  
plain paper  
613 For paper size : Maximum value adjustment for 249  
thick paper 1  
0~255  
1
614 For paper size : Maximum value adjustment for 249  
thick paper 2  
0~255  
1
615 For paper size : Maximum value adjustment for 240  
thick paper 3  
0~255  
1
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 26  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
616 For paper size : Maximum value adjustment for 255  
OHP  
0~255  
1
617 For ID : Full color non-text area (Y)  
618 For ID : Full color non-text area (M)  
619 For ID : Full color non-text area (C)  
620 For ID : Full color non-text area (K)  
621 Calculation results indication for γ correction  
table for 2 pixels (For user automatic gradation  
correction)  
255  
255  
255  
255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
4
0~255  
0~255  
8bit*256*4  
(CMYK)  
622 Calculation results indication for γ correction  
table for 3 pixels (For user automatic gradation  
correction)  
8bit*256*4  
(CMYK)  
4
634 Calculation results indication : Pulse width  
selection for 1 pixel  
8bit*16*4  
(CMYK)  
8bit*16*4  
(CMYK)  
8bit*16*4  
(CMYK)  
4
4
635 Calculation results indication : Pulse width  
selection for 2 pixels  
636 Calculation results indication : Pulse width  
selection for 3 pixels  
4
643 Automatic adjustment of gamma correction  
Auto-correction of gradation r  
13  
10  
10  
10  
4
eproduction for each color Y, M, C, K  
646 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 1 pixel  
(8bit*65*4  
(CMYK))  
(8bit*65*4  
(CMYK))  
(8bit*65*4  
(CMYK))  
8bit*256*4  
647 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 2 pixels  
648 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 3 pixels  
649 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 1 pixel  
650 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 2 pixels  
8bit*256*4  
8bit*256*4  
4
651 Calculation results indication : γ correction table  
creation for 3 pixels  
4
652 Achromatic axis equalization selection  
653 Achromatic axis equalization selection  
654 Achromatic axis equalization selection  
655 Achromatic axis equalization selection  
656 Achromatic axis equalization selection  
657 Total hue adjustment  
0
0
0~1  
0~1  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0~1  
0
0~1  
0
0~1  
128  
0~255  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 26 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
658 Total hue adjustment  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
0
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
659 Total hue adjustment  
660 Total hue adjustment  
661 Total hue adjustment  
662 Total luminance adjustment  
663 Total luminance adjustment  
664 Total luminance adjustment  
665 Total luminance adjustment  
666 Total luminance adjustment  
667 Total saturation adjustment  
668 Total saturation adjustment  
669 Total saturation adjustment  
670 Total saturation adjustment  
671 Total saturation adjustment  
672 Differential threshold (R-G) for ACS  
673 Differential threshold (G-B) for ACS  
674 Differential threshold (B-R) for ACS  
675 Judgement threshold for ACS 104  
0
0
0
0~255 When the value increases, originals  
tend to be judged as monochrome,  
and when the value decreases, they  
tend to be judged as color in  
auto-color mode.  
676 Indication of results for ACS  
677 Outputting of results for ACS  
0
0
2
1
0~1  
678 AI mode setting  
Discrimination  
setting  
0~4  
Operation mode of discrimination  
is changed in AI mode.  
0: Standard (for regular)  
1: Photograph priority  
2: Only judgement of original type  
3: Only judgement of original type  
with photograph priority  
4: Discrimination is not performed  
in AI mode.  
679 Macro recognition : Pre-process text threshold  
0
0
0~255  
0~255  
1
1
adjustment  
681 Macro recognition : Patch area recognition  
ON/OFF  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 26 -2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
682 AI mode setting  
Time-out setting 63  
11~99 Maximum amount of processing  
time is set for image discrimination.  
2 digits are designated, 1st digit is  
for setting A4/LT original, 2nd digit  
is for setting A3/LD original. (unit:  
second)  
1
683 Macro recognition : Pre-process text threshold  
adjustment  
0
0
0
0~7  
0~7  
0~7  
1
1
1
684 Macro recognition : Pre-process background  
threshold adjustment  
685 Macro recognition : Pre-process shading  
threshold adjustment  
687 Background processing : Indication of results  
2
1
Offset amount for  
processing back-  
ground (Back-  
ground density  
adjustment)  
698  
699  
700  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
712  
713  
714  
715  
716  
717  
Full color Text/Photo  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
0~255 When the value increases, the  
Text  
0~255 background becomes denser.  
Printed image  
Photo  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
Map  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
Full color Text/Photo  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
Offset amount for  
processing back-  
ground (Text den-  
sity adjustment)  
When the value increases, the text  
becomes denser.  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
718 Micro recognition : Achromatic threshold, low  
719 Micro recognition : Achromatic threshold, high  
720 Micro recognition : Adjustment (text<->photo),  
color  
0
0
0
0~8191  
0~8191  
0~255  
1
1
1
721 Micro recognition : Adjustment (text<->photo),  
monochrome  
0
0~255  
1
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 27  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
0
Contents  
722 Micro recognition : Text emphasis adjustment,  
color  
0~127  
0~127  
0~99  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
723 Micro recognition : Text emphasis adjustment,  
monochrome  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
724 Micro recognition : Black lowest level threshold,  
color  
725 Micro recognition : Black lowest level threshold,  
monochrome  
0~99  
726 Micro recognition : Logo text inside threshold  
Macro recognition available  
0~100  
0~255  
0~1999  
0~1999  
727 Micro recognition : Recognition expansion /  
threshold adjustment  
728 Micro recognition : Recognition results output,  
color  
729 Micro recognition : Recognition results output,  
monochrome  
730 Sharpness  
Full color Text/Photo (text area)  
Text/Photo (photo area)  
AI (text area)  
AI (photo area)  
Text  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value increases, the im-  
age becomes sharper. When the  
value decreases, the image be-  
comes softer.The smaller the value,  
the fewer the moire becomes.  
* 0 in default is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
731 adjustment  
732  
733  
734  
735  
736  
737  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 27 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
738 Sharpness adjust- Black  
739 ment  
Text/Photo (text area)  
Text/Photo (photo area)  
AI (text area)  
AI (photo area)  
Text  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~31  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~99  
0~63  
When the value increases, the im-  
age becomes sharper. When the  
value decreases, the image be-  
comes softer.The smaller the value,  
the fewer the moire becomes.  
* 0 in default is equivalent to 16  
(center value).  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
740  
741  
742  
743  
Printed image  
Photo  
744  
745  
Map  
746 HPF coefficient  
747 HPF coefficient  
748 HPF coefficient  
749 HPF coefficient  
750 HPF coefficient  
751 LPF coefficient  
752 LPF coefficient  
753 LPF coefficient  
754 LPF coefficient  
755 LPF coefficient  
756 Enlargement/reduction random interpolation  
ON/OFF  
757 Fixed “black” ratio adjustment, type A  
758 Fixed “black” ratio adjustment, type B  
759 Fixed “black” ratio adjustment, type C  
760 Fixed “black” ratio adjustment, type D  
761 “Black” table adjustment, type A  
762 “Black” table adjustment, type B  
763 “Black” table adjustment, type C  
764 “Black” table adjustment, type D  
765 “Black” calculation reference amount  
specification, type A  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~77  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0~77  
0~77  
0~77  
0: Difference between maximum  
and minimum;  
1: Minimum  
766 “Black” calculation reference amount  
specification, type A  
1
1
1
0: Difference between maximum  
and minimum;  
1
1
1
1: Minimum  
767 “Black” calculation reference amount  
specification, type A  
0: Difference between maximum  
and minimum;  
1: Minimum  
768 “Black” calculation reference amount  
specification, type A  
0: Difference between maximum  
and minimum;  
1: Minimum  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 28  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
769 “Black” substitution method specification, type A  
770 “Black” substitution method specification, type B  
771 “Black” substitution method specification, type C  
772 “Black” substitution method specification, type D  
773 Color mode, black text γ adjustment  
0
0:GCR 1:UCR  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
0:GCR 1:UCR  
0:GCR 1:UCR  
0:GCR 1:UCR  
0
0
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
0~255  
774 Color mode, black text γ adjustment  
775 Color mode, black text γ adjustment  
776 Monochrome mode, black text γ adjustment  
777 Monochrome mode, black text γ adjustment  
778 Monochrome mode, black text γ adjustment  
779-0 Color balance  
779-1 adjustment  
779-2  
Y
Low density  
128 0~255 When the value increases, the color  
Text/Photo  
Medium density 128 0~255 and mode become denser.  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
780-0  
Text  
780-1  
Medium density 128 0~255  
780-2  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
781-0  
Printed image  
Photo  
781-1  
Medium density 128 0~255  
781-2  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
782-0  
782-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
782-2  
783-0  
Map  
783-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
783-2  
784-0  
M
Text/Photo  
Text  
784-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
784-2  
785-0  
785-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
785-2  
786-0  
Printed image  
Photo  
786-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
786-2  
787-0  
787-1  
Medium density  
High density  
Low density  
787-2  
788-0  
Map  
788-1  
Medium density  
High density  
788-2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 -28-1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
Color balance  
adjustment  
When the value increases, the color  
and mode become denser.  
789-0  
789-1  
789-2  
790-0  
790-1  
790-2  
791-0  
791-1  
791-2  
792-0  
792-1  
792-2  
793-0  
793-1  
793-2  
794-0  
794-1  
794-2  
795-0  
795-1  
795-2  
796-0  
796-1  
796-2  
797-0  
797-1  
797-2  
798-0  
798-1  
798-2  
C Text/Photo Low density  
128 0~255  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Text  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Printed image Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Photo  
Map  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
K Text/Photo Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Text  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Printed image Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Photo  
Map  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density  
Low density  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Medium density 128 0~255  
High density 128 0~255  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 29  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Acceptable  
Value  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default  
Contents  
817 Output value indica- When the light source  
tion of image quality is OFF  
sensor  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image  
quality sensor when the sensor light  
source is OFF.  
2
818  
819  
820  
Transfer belt surface  
Low density pattern  
High density pattern  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image  
quality sensor when there is no test  
pattern on the transfer belt.  
2
0~1023 Displays the output value of image 10  
quality sensor when a low-density  
test pattern is written.  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image 10  
quality sensor when a high-density  
test pattern is written.  
The sensor's LED light amount ad-  
justment value, for setting the re-  
flected light amount from the belt  
surface as the reference value.  
Perform the image quality control  
Perform the image quality control  
and restore the initial value.  
821 Light amount adjustment results of image qual-  
ity sensor  
0~255  
2
878 Forced performing of image quality control  
879 Automatic initialization of image quality control  
6
6
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 30  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Procedure>  
Group 1  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Set a value)  
POWER  
CLEAR  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
Group 2  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
(A value  
displayed)  
( ENERGY SAVER START )  
(Test copy)  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
POWER  
(Changing the value  
not allowed)  
Group 4  
START  
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
0
5
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Sub-code)  
(Set a value)  
POWER  
CLEAR  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Group 5  
0
5
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
INTERRUPT  
POWER OFF/ON  
START  
(Code)  
(Auto adjustment)  
POWER  
(Stored in memory)  
(Exit)  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 31  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group 6  
0
5
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
START  
(Code)  
(Auto adjustment)  
POWER  
Group 10  
START  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Changing the value not allowed)  
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Sub-code)  
POWER  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Group 13  
0
5
POWER  
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Number of pixels or type)  
STOP  
INTERRUPT  
(Auto adjustment)  
START  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
STOP  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Image processing calculation)  
(Exit)  
Group 15  
0
5
(Set 5 adjustment  
charts for bypass)  
START  
INTERRUPT  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Auto adjustment)  
(Jam or Error)  
(Code)  
POWER  
(Stored in memory)  
CLEAR  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 32  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 5 Setting mode (08)  
The following items can be set or changed in this mode 08.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
Code  
Name  
Default  
Contents  
input value  
200 Date and time setting  
201 Destination selection  
13 digits Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/second  
Example: 99:08:07:5:11:30:48  
1
2
0
0-3:FC15/22 0: Europe (A4/A3/Folio)  
1: USA/Canada (Letter/Ledger)  
1
1
1
0-1:FC25P 2: Japan (A4/B4) 3:Others  
202  
0-3  
0: No external copy counter/controller de-  
vice 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card  
3: Key copy counter  
Externally installed copy counter/  
controller device  
204 Auto clear time setting  
3:FC22  
0-10  
Time-out for cleaning control panel settings  
and returning to the default settings.  
0: Disabled  
0:FC25P  
1 to 10: Set number x 15 second  
205 Energy saver timer setting  
0
0-15: FC15/22 Timer for switching from Ready mode to  
0-19:FC25P Energy Saver selected code 618.  
0: Disabled 1: 30sec. 2: 60sec.  
3: 90sec. 4: 120sec. 5: 150sec.  
6: 3min 7: 4min 8: 5min 9: 7min  
10: 10min 11: 15min 12: 20min  
13: 30min 14: 45min 15: 60min  
16: 90min 17: 120min  
1
18: 180min 19: 240min  
206 Auto-power shut off setting  
20  
0-20  
Timer for switching from Ready mode to  
Auto-Power Shut OFF. US Energy Star  
Compliance  
1
0: 3min 1: 5min 2: 10min 3: 15min  
4: 20min 5: 25min 6: 30min  
7: 40min 8: 50min 9: 60min  
10: 70min 11: 80min 12: 90min  
13: 100min 14: 110min 15: 120min  
16: 150min 17: 180min 18: 210min  
19: 240min 20: Disabled  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 33  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
209  
Name  
Default  
1
Contents  
Timer for Print job start up time  
from copy mode when auto-clear  
is disabled  
1-10  
Set number x 15 seconds  
1
212 Bypass paper default type  
0
0: Plain paper;  
2: A3 wide;  
1: OHP;  
1
1
3: Thick paper 1;  
5: Thick paper 3  
4: Thick paper 2;  
217 Cassette loading status  
15  
0~15  
1: 1st and 2nd cassette  
2: 1st, 2nd, 3rd cassette  
3: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th cassette  
4: 1st cassette (Auto cassette detection is  
not available)  
5: 1st cassette (Auto cassette detection is  
available)  
15: Auto cassette detection  
6, 5~14: Change value to "3" forcibly.  
(1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th cassette)  
0: Language 1  
220 Message language selection  
0
0-2  
0-1  
1
1: Language 2  
2: Language 3  
222  
0
0
0
0: Disabled 1:Enabled  
1
1
All clearing by key copy counter  
removal  
224 Judgement setting during  
DF-ACS  
0: Always full color; 1: Detection for each  
original  
250 Telephone number for “Call for  
service”  
14 digits A telephone number up to 14 digits can be  
1
entered. Use the HELP key to enter hy-  
phens (–).  
253 Error code history display.  
256 LCF paper size  
0
2
1
0-1  
0-1  
0: A4 1: LT  
258 FSMS functinon  
1
0: impossible  
1: possible  
1
259 Large size setting  
0
0: A3, LD, A3W, unspecified bypass ->  
Large size  
1
0-1  
1: A3, LD, A3W, B4, LG, FOLIO, COMP,  
unspecified bypass -> Large size  
260 STR history indication  
-
2
2
267 C9B error code history display  
268 Black display/white display  
switching  
0
0: Black; 1: White  
1
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 34  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
269  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
Forced performing of image quality  
control before the use-level calibration  
0-1  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
1
Maximum number of copies  
allowed  
300  
302  
0
0-2  
0-3  
0:999 1:99 2:9  
1
1
UC: 0  
0: Off 1: Resettable Copy counter  
2: Resettable Original counter  
Resettable Copy and Original  
counter display  
EUR: 3  
3: Resettable Copy and Original counters  
350 Manually placed original  
detection  
0
0
0
0: Not present;  
1: Present  
1
1
1
352 Shooting correction process  
setting  
0: Valid;  
2: Invalid  
353 SALT log table setting  
0: Normal operation;  
1: Forced setting on log table  
(for ACS/full color);  
2: Forced setting on log table  
(for single color/monochrome);  
3: Forced setting on log table (for CCV)  
0: Normal operation;  
354 HDEN control  
0
1
1: HDEN control operation  
355 Sharpness availability setting  
1
0
0: Unavailable;  
1: Available  
1
1
360  
0-1  
0-1  
RADF reversing of transport belt during  
original transporting, to align originals  
against the original scale.  
Switch back  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
361  
0
1
When non-standard originals are used;  
0: Non-standard - Machine will stop and  
prompt operator to select copy size.  
1: Standard - Machine continues the cur-  
rent job without stopping  
1
1
RADF  
Non-standard size original  
detection  
400 Image quality control 1  
0-1  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled (Performing 08-410,413)  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 34 -1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
407  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
Image quality control auto-start  
(continuous print)  
0-1  
When operating continuous printing, image  
quality control is started for every print vol-  
ume set for continuos print (08-453).  
0: Disabled  
1
1: Enabled (Set value of 08-453)  
When the accumulated print volume since  
the last image quality control, set in 08-  
455, is attained, new image quality control  
automatically starts after the current print-  
ing job.  
408  
1
0-1  
1
Image quality control auto-start  
(accumulated print volume)  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled (Setting value of 08-455)  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled  
409 Image quality control 3  
1
1
0-1  
0-1  
1
1
1: Enabled (Performing 08-410,413)  
Performing drum temperature compensa-  
tion for image quality control.  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
Drum temperature compensation  
control  
410  
413  
*WhenImage quality controls 1 and 3 (08-  
400,409)are 1(Enabled), this is reflected.  
Performing transfer bias correction by tem-  
perature and humidity for image quality  
control.  
Transfer bias temperature and  
humidity correction control  
1
0-1  
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
*WhenImage quality controls 1 and 3 (08-  
400,409)are 1(Enabled), this is reflected.  
Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16)  
415  
416  
417  
0
0
0
0-16  
0-16  
0-16  
1
1
1
Abnormal detection counter Y  
(display/0 clearing)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1(Enabled).  
Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16)  
Abnormal detection counter M  
(display/0 clearing)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16)  
Abnormal detection counter C  
(display/0 clearing)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 35  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
418 Abnormal detection counter K  
(display/0 clearing)  
0-16  
Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16)  
1
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
452 Image quality control auto-start  
time setting (ready)  
4
0-24  
Setting time (hour) of Image quality con-  
trol auto-start (ready)  
1
1
453 Image quality control auto-start  
print volume setting (continuous  
printing)  
300  
0-999 Setting print volume (number of sheets) to  
automatically start Image quality control  
(continuous printing)  
Image quality control auto-start  
print volume setting (accumu-  
lated print volume)  
455  
10  
0
0-30  
Setting print volume (x 100 sheets) to au-  
tomatically start Image quality control (ac-  
cumulated print volume)  
1
1
1
480 Paper source priority  
0-5  
0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: 1st cassette  
3: 2nd cassette 4: 3rd cassette  
5: 4th cassette  
481 Automatic paper source change  
1
0-1  
0: OFF 1:Normal  
When 1 is set, a paper source becomes  
empty and the same size paper is present  
in another source, the machine will auto-  
matically switch to that source of paper.  
Setting of pre-running rotation of polygo-  
nal motor  
Pre-running rotation of polygonal  
motor  
485  
0
0-1  
1
0:Low speed rotation (Pre-running rotation)  
1: Stop  
491 Out of specified paper size printing  
0
1
0-1  
0: Disabled  
1
1
1: Enabled  
505 Paper (plain paper, OHP, thick  
paper).  
0: Compatible paper not present;  
1: Compatible paper present  
Switched according to image  
processing  
507 Filter setting selection in Fiery  
scanning  
0
1
0-1  
0-1  
0: non-filter mode (OFF)  
1: filter mode (ON)  
1
1
558 Start setting of developer  
material counter image quality  
control  
0: Disabled  
1: Image quality control is started on  
each setting counter (08-559).  
559 Start count setting of developer  
material counter image quality  
control  
100  
0-999 Image quality control start count is set  
when (08-558) is used  
1
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 36  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
601 Secondary scanning  
0: 100%; 1: 101%  
1
reproduction ratio adjustment  
603 Automatic duplexing mode  
0
0-3  
0-2  
0: Disabled  
1
1
1: Single-sided to Duplexed  
2: Two-sided to Duplexed  
3: User selection  
604 APS (Automatic Paper Selection)  
AMS (Automatic Magnification  
Selection)  
0
0: APS mode 1: AMS mode 2: None  
Mode priority at power on  
605 SAPS mode  
1
0
0: All originals detected;  
1 First original only  
1
1
606 Edge erase default setting  
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 36 -1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
607 RADF priority mode  
0-1  
0
0: Continuous feeding by START key  
1:SADF (Automatic feeding by setting originals)  
0: Invalid; 1: Valid  
1
608 Function clearing immediately  
after copying  
1
1
611 Book duplexing copy priority  
(left/right page)  
0
0-1  
0: Left page to right page  
1: Right page to left page  
612 Image repeat gap  
613 Universal cassette size  
5
0-10mm  
0-13  
1
1
0: A3 1: A4 2: A4-R 3: A5-R 4: B4  
5: B5 6: B5-R 7: LT 8: LT-R 9: LD  
10: LG 11: ST 12: COMPUTER  
13: FOLIO  
UC:12  
EUR:13  
614 Function clearing LED flashing  
615 Free size definition X  
1
0: Invalid; 1: Valid  
1
1
210  
0 – 432 0: Invalid; Other than  
not used 0: Valid  
616 Free size definition Y  
297  
0 – 307 0: Invalid; Other than  
not used 0: Valid  
1
617 RADF image shifting  
618 Energy saver mode  
0
0
0-1  
0-1  
0: Without shift 1: With shift  
1
1
0: Energy saver mode with priority aim of  
energy saving (Refer to 08-712)  
1: Energy saver mode with priority aim of  
returning to copying (Refer to 08-713)  
619 Initial value setting of center void  
width  
10  
0
0-50  
0-2  
1
1
620 APS forced start setting /selection  
0: Single press of key  
1: Double press of key 2: Disabled  
0 – 2 mm (unit: 0.1)  
624 Cut width for all-area copying  
625 Blank paper prevention mode  
628 Macro recognition function  
629 Macro recognition function  
during ADF  
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0: Invalid;  
0: Invalid;  
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
1: Valid  
1: Valid  
630 Automatic bypass-tray/cassette change  
631 Color release control for DF-ACS  
0
0
1
0-1  
0-1  
0-2  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
0: Service technician  
1
1
1
Gradation correction disclosure  
level  
632  
1: Administrator 2: User  
633 By-department control: Black  
copies free  
0
2
0
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
1
1
1
634 Initial value setting of image re-  
peat frequency  
2-8  
0-1  
635 RADF mixed size original priority  
0:Same originai size 1:Mixed original size  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 37  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
636 APS thick paper compatibility  
0:Plain paper;  
2: Mixed  
1: Thick paper;  
1
Automatic sorting mode priority  
from the RADF  
641  
642  
0
0
1
0-3  
0-3  
0: OFF 1: STAPLE 2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
1
1
1
Sorter mode priority at power ON  
(for AC)  
0: NON SORT 1: STAPLE 2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
649 Monochrome copying when  
empty of color toner  
0: Prohibited;  
1: Allowed  
653 Machine administrator’s password  
655 Off-level setting for auto off-mode  
656 Execution mode for self  
diagnostic image processing  
0000 0000-9999  
0
1
1
1
0: Power shutoff; 1: Low power  
0
0 – 255 0: Normal;  
1: Pulse;  
3: Scanner correction 8 color conversion;  
16: Other  
2: γ;  
664 Switching of aging ADF operation  
668 All clearing of ID codes  
669 All clearing of image processing  
05 adjustment values  
0
-
0: Single-side; 1: Both-side  
1
3
3
-
670 All clearing of halfway results  
of color conversion  
-
-
-
3
3
3
671 All clearing of pulse width  
selection adjustment results  
672 All clearing of γ correction  
table adjustment results  
678 Mode memory initialization  
679 Weekly timer initialization  
681 Support for cascading exit  
682 (Auto job start: Magazine-sort  
setting)  
-
-
3
3
1
0
0~1  
0
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
0: Left-hand opening;  
1: Right-hand opening  
700 Fuser thermistor status counter  
(C7 counter)  
0
0-9  
2: 2nd-time abnormality of thermistor/  
heater at warming-up start  
3: Unused 6: Thermistor abnormal after  
“ready” is attained.  
1
9: Heater abnormal after “ready” is  
attained (high temp.)  
712 Upper and lower fuser roller tem-  
perature for energy saver mode  
with priority aim of energy  
saving  
2
0-6  
0: OFF 1: 60°C 2: 70°C 3: 80°C  
4: 115°C 5: 125°C 6: 135°C  
1
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 37 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
5
Contents  
713 Upper and lower fuser roller tem-  
perature for energy saver mode  
with priority aim of returning to  
copying  
0-6  
0:OFF 1:60°C 2:70°C  
1
3:80°C 4:115°C 5:125°C 6:135°C  
742 Color registration control  
743  
0
1
0
0-1  
0-1  
0: Automatic 1: Manual  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
1
1
1
801 Electronic total copy/print counter  
0-999999 Electronic counter counts all copies and  
prints including all test mode copies.  
* The mechanical counter only counts the  
customerscopies and prints, not test mode  
copies or prints.  
Color registration control for  
warming-up  
802 Large paper size double count  
0
0-2  
0: Disabled  
1
1: Double count - A3, LD, A3 wide  
2:Double count - A3, LD, A3 wide, B4, LG,  
FOLIO, COMP  
803 Short-size counter (postcard -A4/LT)  
804 Long-size counter (B4 - A3 wide)  
805 Full-color print counter (Copier)  
0
0
0
0-999999 Display of counter value  
0-999999 Display of counter value  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
1
1
1
806 Black print counter (Copier)  
807 Mono-color print counter (Copier)  
808 Bypass counter  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
809 LCF counter  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
810 Full-color print counter (Printer)  
811 Black print counter (Printer)  
812 Mono-color print counter (Printer)  
813 Test print counter  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Code 08-802 is  
reflected)  
0-999999 In case of Test print, only this counter is  
counted.Display of counter value  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
814 Single-sided print counter  
Refer to "Counter function and maintenance chacke list"  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 38  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
815 Duplexed print counter  
0-999999 Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
1
817 Bypass jam counter  
0
0
0-999999 Accumulated total of E12  
0-999999 Jam on paper trailing edge by registration  
roller  
1
1
818 Registration jam counter  
820 Paper exit jam counter  
822 ADU counter  
0
0
0-999999 Accumulated total of E01, E02  
0-999999 ADU feed counter  
1
1
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
824 RADF original counter  
0
0-999999 RADF feed counter  
1
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
825 LCF jam counter  
0
0
0
1
0
0-999999 Accumulated total of E19, E21  
0-999999 Accumulated total of E11, E54  
0-999999 Accumulated total of E50, E51, E52  
1
1
1
1
1
826 ADU paper-feed jam counter  
827 ADU stack jam counter  
831 Key copy counter function  
832 1st cassette counter  
0-3  
1: PPC 2: Printer 3: PPC/Printer  
0-999999 Paper feed counter of 1st cassette  
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
833 2nd cassette counter  
834 3rd cassette counter  
835 4th cassette counter  
0
0
0
0-999999 Paper feed counter of 2nd cassette  
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
1
1
1
0-999999 Paper feed counter of 3rd cassette  
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
0-999999 Paper feed counter of 4th cassette  
Display of counter value (Single count for  
every paper size)  
836 1st cassette jam counter  
837 2nd cassette jam counter  
838 3rd cassette jam counter  
839 4th cassette jam counter  
0
0
0
0
0
0-999999 Accumulated total of E13, E22  
0-999999 Accumulated total of E14, E23  
0-999999 Accumulated total of E15, E24  
0-999999 Accumulated total of E16, E25  
0-65535 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
1
1
1
1
1
Drum Y life counter (display/0  
clearing)  
840  
Drum M life counter (display/0  
clearing)  
841  
0
0-65535 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
1
Refer to "Counter function and maintenance chacke list"  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 39  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
842 Drum C life counter (display/0  
clearing)  
0-65535 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
1
reflected)/0 clearing  
Drum K life counter (display/0  
843  
0
0
0
0
0
0-65535 Number of printed sheets  
1
1
1
1
1
clearing)  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Developer Y counter (display/0  
clearing)  
844  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Developer M counter (display/0  
clearing)  
845  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Developer C counter (display/0  
clearing)  
846  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Developer K counter (display/0  
clearing)  
847  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
0-65535 Frequency that Y, M and C wire cleaning  
pads reciprocate  
851  
852  
853  
0
0
0
1
1
1
“Color” charger wire cleaner  
counter (display/0 clearing)  
“Black” charger wire cleaner (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
0-65535 Frequency that K wire cleaning pad recip-  
rocates  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Transfer-belt unit counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
854  
855  
856  
0
0
0
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
1
1
1
Fuser unit counter (display/0  
clearing)  
0-999999 Number of printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 is  
reflected)/0 clearing  
Fuser oil-roller counter (display/  
0 clearing)  
0-999999 Rotation time of fuser motor (sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
0-999999 Counter value (number or sheets)  
Fuser oil-roller time counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
857 Counter setting for PM  
0
1
1
1
858 OHP/thick-paper double count  
0-1  
0: Disabled:  
Double count - A3 wide, A3, LD, B4, LG, FOLIO, COMP  
1: Enabled:  
Quadruple count - A3 wide, A3, LD, B4, LG, FOLIO, COMP  
Double count - A4, A4-R, LT, LT-R, B5, B5-R, ST-R, A5, A6-R  
Refer to "Counter function and maintenance chacke list"  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 40  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
867 Drum Y drive counter (display/0  
clearing)  
0-999999 Rotation time ofY drum drive motor (sec.)  
1
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
868 Drum M drive counter (display/0  
clearing)  
0
0
0
0
0-999999 Rotation time of M drum drive motor (sec.)  
1
1
1
1
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
869 Drum C drive counter (display/0  
clearing)  
0-999999 Rotation time of C drum drive motor (sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
Drum K drive counter (display/0  
clearing)  
870  
0-999999 Rotation time of K drum drive motor (sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
Developer Y time counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
871  
0-999999 Rotation time of color development motor  
(sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
Developer M time counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
872  
0
0
0
0-999999 Rotation time of color development motor  
1
1
1
(sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
873 Developer C time counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
0-999999 Rotation time of color development motor  
(sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
Developer K time counter (dis-  
play/0 clearing)  
874  
0-999999 Rotation time of black development motor  
(sec.)  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
0 – 999999  
876 Full color, large size copy counter  
877 Full color, small size copy counter  
878 Black, large size copy counter  
879 Black, small size copy counter  
880 Mono-color, large size copy counter  
881 Mono-color, small size copy counter  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 – 999999  
0 – 999999  
0 – 999999  
0 – 999999  
0 – 999999  
882  
Printer  
Full-color Long size  
Short size  
0 – 999999  
883 counter  
0 – 999999  
884 (Printer) Black  
885  
Long size  
Short size  
0 – 999999  
0 – 999999  
888 Long size setting of Setting code  
(08-876~885)  
1 – 2  
1: A3, LD, A3W  
2: A3, LD, A3W, B4, LG, FOLIO, COMP  
892 Current counter value for PM  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
0-999999 Total number of sheets (Copier+printer) for  
life related (double count)  
1
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 are  
reflected.)/0 clearing  
Refer to "Counter function and maintenance check list"  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 41  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
procedure  
group  
Allowable  
input value  
Code  
Name  
Default  
0
Contents  
894 Drum drive total counter for color  
PM time counter (display/0 clear-  
ing)  
0-999999999 Rotation time(sec.) of Y, M and C drum  
drive motor  
1
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
0-999999 Number of color printed sheets  
Display of counter value (Code 08-858 are  
reflected.)/0 clearing  
896  
0
1
Current counter value for color  
PM (display/0 clearing)  
897 Counter setting for color PM  
898 Drum drive total counter for PM  
life-time counter (display/0 clear-  
ing)  
0
0
0-999999 Counter value (number of sheets)  
0-999999999 Rotation time(sec.) of K drum drive motor  
Display of counter value/0 clearing  
1
1
900 Firmware version (Basic part ROM)  
902 Engine ROM version (LGC)  
903 Engine ROM version (IMC)  
904 SCAN ROM version  
-
2
2
2
2
2
1
906 Macro recognition, control version  
917 Waiting time for requesting  
scanner resource acquisition  
918 Auto clearing if no copy paper is  
available during MFP  
3
0: Invalid; 1 – 9: Set value x 5 seconds  
When no  
0
1
0
0: Does not start; 1: Starts  
1
1
1
copy paper is  
available,  
0: Invalid;  
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
1: Valid  
printing:  
919 Automatic printer restart during  
auto job start  
956 Setting FC key when default  
cassette is empty of paper  
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
957 Position aligning icon displaying  
958 Time setting icon displaying  
961 Scanning order in dual-page  
copying  
0
0
0
0: Invalid;  
0: Invalid;  
1: Valid  
1: Valid  
1
1
1
0: From right; 1: From left  
997 Long/Short size counter  
List display of Money collection counter  
(08-876~885)  
2
Refer to "Counter function and maintenance check list"  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 41 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Operation procedure>  
Group 1  
0
8
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
START  
(Code)  
(Set a value)  
CLEAR  
POWER  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
Group 2  
0
8
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Changing the value is not allowed)  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Code)  
POWER  
(Exit)  
Group 3  
0
8
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(System mode display)  
POWER  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 42  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 6 Registering/changing ID codes  
When ID codes are registered, copy count will be classified according to each ID code. Copies cannot  
be made without entering one of the ID codes registered with digital keys.  
Procedure for using the ID code mode:  
0
8
SET  
POWER OFF  
600  
2
START  
(Dept. control)  
POWER  
Procedure for registering ID codes:  
8
START  
display  
Enter a 4-digit ID code.  
(Example: 0525)  
POWER  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
[0525  
]
ID  
[
0
0
0
0]  
Full color  
Black  
Mono-color  
Total  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
display  
(Up to 120 ID codes can be registered)  
(Input a next code)  
Warming up  
Normal copy mode  
START  
(ID registration mode completed)  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 43  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Correcting ID code  
8
START  
[0525  
[
]
POWER  
0
0
0
0]  
Erasing an ID code:  
CLEAR  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
display  
Displaying the next ID code:  
ID  
(Next ID code displayed)  
Adding an ID code  
(Input an ID code)  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
While  
displayed  
Changing the “full-color” counter:  
HELP  
(Input a counter value.)  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
Changing the “black” counter:  
Press HELP twice  
(Input a counter value)  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
Changing the “mono-color” counter:  
Press HELP 3 times  
(Input a counter value)  
ENERGY SAVER (registered)  
To finish the registration mode and return to normal copy mode:  
START  
Warming up  
Normal copy mode  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 44  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.3 Adjustment Order (Copy Image Related Adjustment)  
The diagram below explains the main procedures for image related adjustment.  
When replacing components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified  
instructions are to be obeyed in priority.  
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential ajustments, while the dotted lines  
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.  
Parts to be replaced  
Developer material  
Processing unit (EPU)  
Drum  
Transfer/transport unit  
Transfer belt  
Main charger wire  
Main charger grid  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
200-204, 221  
1.4 Automatic adjustment of the auto-  
toner circuit  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
879  
1.5 Automatic initialization of image  
quality control  
Copy image dimensional adjustment  
Items  
Adjustment  
order  
Code in  
mode 05  
439 - 452  
406  
1
2
1.6.1 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the main registration roller  
1.6.2 Feed motor speed adjustment  
1.6.3  
Printer  
3
4
(a) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction  
(b) Primary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
400  
470  
related  
adjustment  
5
6
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction 401  
(d) Secondary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
474  
7
(Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed)*  
404  
8
9
(a) Image distortion adjustment  
482  
104  
106, 108  
484 - 490  
105  
427  
428  
1.6.4  
(b) Image skewing adjustment  
Scanner  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
(c) Primary-scanning reproduction ratio (scanner)  
related  
adjustment  
(d) Scanner copy length reproduction ratio adjustment  
(e) CCD primary scanning start position deviation  
(f) Secondary-scanning data write start position adjustment (Copier)  
(g) Scanner (secondary scanning) start position deviation  
(h) Right margin (Printed page right edge void adjustment)  
(i) Bottom margin (Printed page trailing edge void adjustment)  
* “Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed”  
should be adjusted after printer related adjustment.  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
643  
1.7 Automatic adjustment of gamma correction  
Image quality adjustment  
Items  
Code in mode 05  
550 - 589  
779 - 789  
698 - 717  
675  
1.8 Density adjustment  
1.9 Color balance adjustment  
1.10 Offset amount for processing background  
1.11 Judgement threshold for ACS  
1.12 AI mode setting  
678, 682  
730 - 745  
1.13 Sharpness adjustment  
END  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 45  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 4 Automatic Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Circuit  
With this copier, the filling and removing of developer material is automatically performed by opera-  
tion from the control panel. In addition, the auto-toner sensor is automatically adjusted successively  
after the automatic filling of developer material.  
<Operation procedure>  
Note: At the time of unpacking, if developer material is not filled, the steps (3) and (4) below do not need  
to be performed.  
(1) Remove the toner cartridges.  
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.The following appears on the display:  
100%  
A
A3  
[0] [5]  
TEST MODE  
[POWER]  
(3) Input a code with digital keys and press the [START] key.The developer material is removed.  
Code 390 : All developer materials are removed (developer materials Y, M, C and K).  
391 : All color developer materials are removed (developer materials Y, M and C).  
392 : Only developer material K is removed.  
(4) After all developer materials are removed, press the [INTERRUPT] key.  
Time required for removing All developer materials  
Color developer materials only : Approx. 6 min.  
Developer material K only : Approx. 3 min.  
: Approx.10 min.  
(5) Open the front cover, install the developer cartridge(s) and then close the cover.  
* When installing or uninstalling the developer cartridge(s), it is necessary to open and close the  
front cover.  
(6) Input a code with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
Code 200 : All developer materials  
204 : Developer material K only  
221 : Color developer materials only  
100%  
200  
A3  
(Code) [START]  
TEST MODE  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 46  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) When the copier starts operating, a message “WAIT” is shown and the developer material filling  
starts (approx. 2 minutes and 30 seconds).  
WAIT  
(8) Approx. 2 minutes after the developer material filling is finished, the following display appears:  
Y:6.30V M:6.38V C:6.38V K:6.38V  
61%  
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Upper line : Current sensor voltages (V)  
Middle line : Humidity (%)  
Lower line :Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages  
Note:  
• The current sensor voltages (V) shown in automatically changes, gradually approaching the target values  
for adjustment reference voltages shown in .  
• Values are displayed only for the developer materials being filled.  
(9) In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltages (V) in are converged to those in .The humidity  
shown in disappears, and the sensor output control values (bit values) are shown instead.  
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Y: 135 M: 135 C: 135 K: 135  
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Note: Be careful that the values in , and vary with humidity.  
: Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage  
Humidity (%)  
~59.9  
Y
M
C
K
4.00  
4.14  
4.35  
4.00  
4.14  
4.35  
4.00  
4.14  
4.35  
4.00  
4.12  
4.31  
60.0~74.9  
75.0~  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 47  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
: Current sensor voltage (V)  
Humidity (%)  
~59.9  
Y
M
C
K
3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05  
4.09~4.19 4.09~4.19 4.09~4.19 4.07~4.17  
4.30~4.40 4.30~4.40 4.30~4.40 4.26~4.36  
60.0~74.9  
75.0~  
(10) If an adjustment error occurs, values of the color in problem displayed in A, B or C are replaced with  
***”.  
As for properly adjusted colors, press the [INTERRUPT] key to store their adjustment results in  
memory.  
(11) Press the [INTERRUPT] key to store the adjustment results in memory. The screen returns to the  
initial display.  
100%  
A
A3  
[INTERRUPT]  
TEST MODE  
(12) Remove the developer cartridge(s).  
(13) Install the toner cartridge(s).  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 48  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Troubleshooting in auto-toner sensor adjustment> (measures against adjustment error)  
Check which color is in adjustment error.  
Is the developer unit filled with developer material? (Is the developer cartridge empty?)  
NO  
(1) Check if the shutter seal is removed from the developer cartridge.  
(2) Check the toner motor performance, using the following test mode.  
Y: 03-110 ON, 03-160 OFF  
M: 03-111 ON, 03-161 OFF  
C: 03-112 ON, 03-162 OFF  
YES  
K: 03-113 ON, 03-163 OFF  
(3) Check if the developer cartridge gears rotate properly.  
As for the colors completely adjusted, press [INTERRUPT] to store their adjustment results in memory.  
Perform again the adjustment procedure to the color in adjustment error.  
05-200: All developers  
05-202: Developer M  
05-204: Developer K  
05-201: Developer Y  
05-203: Developer C  
05-221: Color developers  
Is the adjustment completed?  
NO  
(1) Check if the developer unit is filled with developer material.  
(2) Check if any toner or carrier is stuck on the transfer belt or the drum surface at the base of EPU.  
NO  
• Check the high-voltage contacts.  
• Main charger wire  
• Main charger grid  
• Developer bias  
YES  
Replace disabled parts.  
Replace EPU.  
YES  
Perform the adjustment procedure again.  
Press [INTERRUPT] to store the adjustment results in memory.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 49  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.5 Automatic Initialization of Image Quality Control  
(1) At the time of unpacking  
Prior to copy-image dimensional adjustment, perform the 05-879 “Automatic initialization of image  
quality control” procedure.  
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the 05-879 “Automatic initialization  
of image quality control” procedure.  
• Processing unit  
• Laser optical unit  
Transfer belt unit  
• Photoconductive drum  
• Developer material  
• Image quality sensor  
Note: When performing automatic adjustment of gamma correction in addition, “Automatic initialization of  
image quality control” should be done first.  
(3) When performing automatic adjustment of gamma correction in cases other than the above ones,  
do the 05-878 “Forced performing of image quality control” procedure before automatic gamma  
value correction.  
Code  
878  
Adjustment item  
Forced performing of  
image quality control  
Content  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Input [878] with digital keys and press [START].  
(3) When the adjustment finishes normally, the copier will return to  
the adjustment mode’s initial state.  
If an abnormal condition has occurred, take appropriate action by  
referring to “4. TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
879  
Automatic initialization of  
image quality control  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Input [879] with digital keys and press [START].  
(3) When the adjustment finishes normally, the copier will return to  
the adjustment mode’s initial state.  
If an abnormal condition has occurred, take appropriate action by  
referring to “4. TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 50  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 6 Copy Image Dimensional Adjustment  
There are several adjustment items in the copy image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior  
to this image dimensional adjustment, perform the automatic initialization of image quality control  
(code [879] in adjustment mode 05). When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order  
should strictly be observed.  
Adjustment items  
Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the main registration roller  
Feed motor speed adjustment  
Code in mode 05  
439 – 452  
406  
(a) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction  
(Fine-adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)  
(b) Primary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction  
(Fine-adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)  
(d) Secondary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
(Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed)*  
(a) Image distortion adjustment  
400  
470  
401  
474  
404  
(b) Image skewing adjustment  
(c) Primary-scanning reproduction ratio (scanner)  
(d) Scanner copy length reproduction ratio adjustment  
(e) CCD primary-scanning start position deviation  
(f) Secondary scanning data write start position adjustment (Copier)  
(g) Scanner (secondary scanning) start position deviation  
482  
104  
106, 108  
484 – 490  
105  
Scrladjusment  
(h) Right margin (Printed page right edge void adjustment)  
(i) Bottom margin (Printed page trailing edge void adjustment  
427  
428  
* “Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed” should be adjusted after printer related adjustment.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 51  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure for inputting adjustment values]  
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that  
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [ENERGY  
SAVER] key, immediately after starting the adjustment mode “05”, single-sided test copying can be  
performed (normal copy mode).  
Varies with the code “XXX” entered with digital keys.  
<Operation keys>  
<Display>  
100%  
A
A3  
TEST MODE  
0
5
POWER  
1
Code No.  
Digital keys : Input codes.  
100%  
XXX  
A3  
START  
TEST MODE  
Digital keys : Input adjustment  
values.  
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)  
YYY  
ZZZ  
Adjustment value newly input  
(If no input, YYY is displayed.)  
Current adjustment value  
100%  
A
A
A3  
A3  
SET  
or  
Value ZZZ is stored  
replacing values YYY.  
TEST MODE  
INTERRUPT  
ENERGY  
SAVER  
100%  
Test copy  
Wait Warming Up  
START  
If the test copy does not  
satisfy the specified values,  
return to the step 1 and  
repeat the adjustment  
procedure.  
100%  
COPYING  
A
A3  
: Exit the adjustment mode.  
Power OFF/ON  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 52  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 6. 1 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the main registration roller  
If the paper feed roller has prematurely become defective, it is possible to extend its service life, if  
necessary, by increasing the aligning amount, as a temporary measure until a replacement becomes  
available.  
<Operation procedure> (Use codes 439 to 452 in adjustment mode “05”.)  
Copier cassettes  
ADU  
Bypass  
feeding  
Thick  
paper2  
Thick  
paper3  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
LCF  
449  
cassette cassette cassette cassette  
Long size  
Short size  
439  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
450  
451  
452  
(1)  
Digital keys  
Digital keys  
(Input a new value.)  
0
5
START  
(Current value displayed)  
Paper  
POWER  
source code  
SET  
or  
INTERRUPT  
ENERGY SAVER  
START  
(Select a paper source)  
Power OFF/ON  
(Test copy)  
(Stored in memory)  
(2) Check for any transfer void orZfold.If a trans-  
fer problem is present, try the values in de-  
scending order as “31”“30””29"··· until the  
transfer void disappears. At the same time,  
confirm that any paper jam has not occurred.  
Also, when the aligning amount has been in-  
creased, this may increase the scraping sound  
which occurs when the paper scrapes on the  
mylar sheet as it is transferred by the regis-  
tration roller. If this scraping sound is irritat-  
ing, try reducing the aligning amount.  
Transfer void  
“Z” fold  
(3) Do the same for ADU, LCF, bypass feeding,  
thick paper 2 and thick paper 3.  
Note:  
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration section. In this  
case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.  
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this could cause the leading edge void to vary adversely.  
So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while checking the leading edge  
void at the same time.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 53  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.6.2 Feed motor speed adjustment  
The paper transport speed of the registration roller vis-a-vis the image pirnt speed can be set to the  
optimum value.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
(2) Set five sheets of A4-R (LT-R) paper into the bypass tray.  
(3) Input [10] and press the [SETTINGS] key to perform the continuous printing of five “adjustment  
charts” from the bypass tray.  
(4) Since the printed sheets of “adjustment charts” are slightly shrunk after being fused, it it required to  
wait one or two minutes to cool them for precise adjustment. Then, set those five sheets again into  
the bypass tray in the same print direction, with the chart face upward.  
(5) Without changing the mode [05], enter [406] and press [START].  
While the “adjustment chart” sheets are fed and transported, the pitches in the black belt zone are  
read.  
(6) The step (5) is to be repeated five times automatically.  
The displayed set value does not change until the fourth printing round and at the finel fifth round, a  
newly set value is displayed.  
(7) When a newly set value for aligning is displayed at the fifth round, press the [INTERRUPT] key to  
update the set value.  
If ERROR is displayed at the second paper feeding, press the [CLEAR] key and return to the step  
(2).  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 54  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 6. 3 Printer related adjustment  
(a) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor  
rotation speed)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.(Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1][SETTINGS]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares illustrated later is printed out. Use A3  
(LD) from the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance A from the first grid line at the rear to the 21st of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance A is within 200 ± 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode)(Input code [400] with digital keys)[START]  
(Input a value (acceptable values: 1209 to 1235) with digital keys)  
[SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key (Stored in memory)  
(Input code [407] with digital keys)[START]  
Color registration control forced performing  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance A becomes  
(0.082 %/step = 0.164 mm/step).  
(b) Primary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.(Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1][SETTINGS]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3 (LD) from the 2nd  
cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance B from the front edge of the paper to the 1st grid line from the front of the grid  
pattern.  
4. Check if the distance B is within 5 ± 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2 to 4 above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode)(Input code [470] with digital keys)[START]  
(Input a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)  
[SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key (Stored in memory).  
(Input code [407] with digital keys)[START]  
Color registration control forced performing  
*The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance B becomes  
(0.0423 mm/step).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 55  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt mo-  
tor rotation speed)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.(Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1][SETTINGS]. (A grid pattern illustrated later is printed out. Use A3 (LD) from the 2nd  
cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance C from the 6th to 26th grid lines of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance C is within 200 ± 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2 to 4 above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode)(Input code [401] with digital keys)[START](Input a value (ac-  
ceptable values: 1327 to 1382) with digital keys)[SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key  
(Stored in memory).(Input code [407] with digital keys)[START]Color registration  
control forced performing  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance C becomes (0.074 %/step =  
0.15 mm/step).  
(d) Secondary-scanning data write start position adjustment  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.(Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1][SETTINGS]. (The following grid pattern is printed out. Use A3 (LD) from the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th grid line of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance D is within 55 ± 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode)(Input code [474] with digital keys)[START](Input a value (ac-  
ceptable values: 0 to 15) with digital keys)[SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key (Stored in  
memory).(Input code [407] with digital keys)[START]Color registration control  
forced performing  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance D becomes (0.6 mm/step).  
Note: The reproduction ratio adjustment and the data write start position adjustment in the primary and  
secondary scanning directions have a connection as shown below.  
1. When [05-400] is adjusted, [05-401, 402, 403, 404 and 474] are automatically adjusted.  
2. When [05-401] is adjusted, [05-402, 403, 404 and 474] are automatically adjusted.  
3. When [05-406] is adjusted, [05-404] is automatically adjusted.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 56  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
1
B
A
[Grid pattern]  
<Adjustment order>  
[0] [5] [power ON] [1] [SETTINGS] (2nd cassette, A3/LD)  
A: 05-400 200±0.5 mm (0.164 mm/step) 05-407  
B: 05-470 ৎ  
5±0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step) 05-407  
C: 05-401 200±0.5 mm (0.15 mm/step) 05-407  
D: 05-474 55±0.5 mm (0.6 mm/step)  
05-407  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 57  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.6.4 Scanner related adjustment  
(a) Image distortion adjustment  
Note: The screws on the rear side of the mirrors 1 and 3 must not be adjusted.  
Feeding direction  
Step 1  
B
A
Image  
Feeding direction  
Step 2  
C
D
<Procedure>  
Remove the original glass and the left top cover,  
and then move the carriage 1 toward the paper  
exit side until it stops. Insert a plus type screw-  
driver into the hole of the indicator unit and ad-  
just the screws, following the step 1 to step 2.  
Mirror-2  
Step 1  
In case of A:  
Tighten the mirror-2 adjustment screw (CW).  
Go to C  
In case of B:  
Loosen the mirror-2 adjustment screw (CCW).  
Go to D  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 58  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2  
In case of C:  
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW).  
Normal image  
In case of D:  
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW).  
Normal image  
Note: After the image distortion adjustment, when  
the adjustment screws of the mirror 1 and 2  
are turned, lock the adjustment screws us-  
ing the screw locking agent “BOND-1324”.  
Mirror-1  
[Application Method of the Adhesive for the  
Screw Locking]  
(1) Adjust the image distortion.  
(2) Remove the original glass and the indicator unit.  
(3) Move the carriage 1 toward the paper exit side.  
(4) Apply the adhesive (BOND-1324) to the adjust-  
ment screws of carriage 1 and 2.  
Note: Application Method  
*Apply good quantity of the adhesive to the “Ap-  
plication area”.  
*The adhesive needs 12 hours to harden com-  
pletely.  
Application area  
Carriage frame  
(5) Confirm that there is no dust or stain on the mir-  
ror 1, 2 or 3 or the shading correction plate.  
(6) Install the indicator unit and the original glass.  
Mirror  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 59  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Image skewing adjustment  
Feeding direction  
Image  
Feeding direction  
Paper  
If the copy image is tilted even when the original is  
placed precisely against the original scale, adjust  
the original scale to correct this problem.  
When the image is tilted as in A:  
• Adjust the original scale in the direction of the  
arrow A  
.
A
B
When the image is tilted as in B:  
• Adjust the original scale in the direction of the  
arrow B  
.
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 60  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following adjustments (c) to (i) should be conducted using Test Chart No.TCC-1. (Refer to page  
1-64.)  
(c) Primary-scanning reproduction ratio (Scanner)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance A is within a range of 200±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [482] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(Input code [407] with digital keys) [START]Color registration control forced per-  
forming  
* The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance A becomes (0.2 mm/step).  
(d) Scanner copy length reproduction ratio adjustment  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance B between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance B is within a range of 150±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [104] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(Input code [407] with digital keys) [START]Color registration control forced per-  
forming  
* The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance B becomes. (0.23 mm/step)  
(e) CCD primary-scanning start position deviation  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance C from the left edge of the paper to the left-edge mark (5 mm) on the copy with  
a ruler.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 61  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Check if the distance C is within a range of 5±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [106] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 5 to 251) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
* The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance C becomes (0.042 mm/  
step).  
7. When the distance C is within the acceptable range, perform the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [108] with digital keys) [START] (Input a setting  
value with digital keys, deducting 47 from the value set in the code [106] adjustment  
mode 05) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(f) Secondary-scanning data write start position adjustment (Copier)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance D from the upper paper edge to the upper write-start position on the copy with  
a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance D is within a range of 5±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
* This adjustment should be done for each of the cassettes.  
The adjustment order is : 2nd cassette 1st cassette 3rd cassette 4th cassette Bypass  
tray LCF ADU.  
The adjustment code for each cassette is as follows:  
1st cassette : 484  
4th cassette : 487  
2nd cassette : 485  
Bypass tray : 488  
3rd cassette : 486  
LCF 489  
:
ADU  
: 490  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input a code [485 to 490] with digital keys) [START] (Input  
a value (acceptable values : 0 to 15) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in  
memory)  
* The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance D becomes (0.6 mm/step).  
(g) Scanner (secondary scanning) start position deviation  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 62  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance E from the upper paper edge to the upper mark (10 mm) on the copy with a  
ruler.  
5. Check if the distance E is within a range of 10±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [105] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 128 to 135) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
* The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance E becomes (0.12 mm/step).  
(h) Right margin (Printed page right edge void adjustment)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the blank area F to the right of the copy image with a ruler.  
5. Check if the blank area F is within a range of 2±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [427] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
* The larger the adjustment value, the larger the blank area becomes (0.042 mm/step).  
(i) Bottom margin (Printed page trailing edge void adjustment)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4 (LT), 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the blank area G beneath the copy image with a ruler.  
5. Check if the blank area G is within a range of 2.5±0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat the steps 2 to 4 above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) (Input code [428] with digital keys) [START] (Input a value  
(acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
* The larger the adjustment value, the larger the blank area becomes (0.042 mm/step).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 63  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
E
D
G
Feeding direction  
[Chart TCC-1]  
<Adjustment order>  
[0][5][Power ON] (Chart TCC-1) [ENERGY SAVER] [START] (A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/photo)  
A: 05-482 200±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step) 05-407  
B: 05-104 150±0.5 mm (0.23 mm/step) 05-407  
C: 05-106 5±0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step)  
D: 05-485(2nd), 484(1st), 486(3rd) ,487(4th), 488(bypass), 489(LCF) and 490(ADU)5±0.5 mm (0.6 mm/step)  
E: 05-105 10±0.5 mm (0.12 mm/step)  
F: 05-427 2±0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step)  
G: 05-428 2.5±0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step)  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 64  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9]  
[8]  
[1]  
[10]  
[5]  
[3]  
[2]  
[2]  
[3]  
[2]  
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART  
No.TCC-1  
[7]  
[1]  
[1]  
[6]  
[6]  
[4]  
[3]  
[14]  
[11]  
[12]  
[7]  
[7]  
[7]  
[2]  
[13]  
[1]  
[8]  
[1] Grid lines  
: For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section  
: For checking uniformity  
[2] YMCK patches  
[3] Resolution pattern  
[4] Gradation pattern  
: For checking resolution  
: Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)  
Coverage ratio: 10-100%  
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance  
: For checking color registration  
[5] Color registration pattern  
[6] Pictures  
: For checking color reproduction and moire  
[7] Magnification lines  
: For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary scan-  
ning directions  
[8] Center lines  
[9] Arrow  
: Center lines for A4/LT sizes  
: A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass (place it  
to the left rear corner of the original glass).  
: For checking uniformity  
[10] Halftone band  
[11] White text on the black solid : For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid  
[12] Text  
: For checking reproduction of text  
[13] Thin lines  
[14] Note area  
: For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm).  
: For recording the date, conditions, etc.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 65  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 7 Automatic Adjustment of Gamma Correction  
(1) At the time of unpacking:  
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y,  
M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic adjustment of gamma correction. Check  
the image, and if the gradation reproduction is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described  
below.  
(2) When any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjustment:  
• Laser optical unit  
• Drum  
• Developer material  
(3) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to  
determine if the adjustment is necessary:  
• Main charger  
Transfer belt  
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the copy image adjustment in “1.5 Auto-  
matic Initialization of Image Quality Control” and "1.6 Copy Image Dimensional Adjustment".  
Code  
643  
Adjustment item  
Automatic adjustment  
of gamma correction  
Content  
<Procedure>  
Adjustment of Text or Map mode  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Press [4] [SETTINGS] and output a “Patch chart for gamma  
adjustment”.  
(3) Place the “Patch chart for gamma adjustmentproduced in step  
(2), face down onto the original glass, with the side, on which a  
black band is present, precisely against the original scale.  
(4) Input code [643] with digital keys and press [START].  
(5) Input [2] with digital keys, and press [START] and then [INTER-  
RUPT] The scanner reads the original automatically and  
performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30  
sec.).  
(6) When the adjustment ends normally, SCAN COMPLETE” is  
shown.Press [START] to have the adjustment results reflected.  
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press [STOP].)  
When “COMPLETE” is shown, press [STOP] to return to the  
standby state.  
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR”  
is shown. Press [STOP] to clear the error display. When it is  
cleared, the control panel display will return to the standby state.  
Then, check if the gradation pattern image on the original glass  
is oriented in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the  
original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 66  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Adjustment of other modes>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Press [5] [SETTINGS] to output a “Patch chart for gamma  
adjustment”.  
(3) Place the “Patch chart for gamma adjustmentproduced in step  
(2), face down onto the original glass, with the side, on which a  
black band is present, precisely against the original scale.  
(4) Input code [643] with digital keys and press [START].  
(5) Input [3] with digital keys, and press [START] and then [INTER-  
RUPT]. The scanner reads the original automatically and  
performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30  
sec.).  
(6) When the adjustment ends normally, SCAN COMPLETE” is  
shown.Press [START] to have the adjustment results reflected.  
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press [STOP].)  
When “COMPLETE” is shown, press [STOP] to return to the  
standby state.  
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR”  
is shown. Press [STOP] to clear the error display. When it is  
cleared, the control panel display will return to the standby state.  
Then, check if the gradation pattern image on the original glass  
is oriented in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the  
original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 67  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 8 Density Adjustment  
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted  
as follows.  
Copy mode  
Items to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Color  
mode  
Printed  
image  
Text/photo  
550  
Text  
551  
561  
571  
581  
556  
566  
576  
586  
Photo  
553  
563  
573  
583  
558  
568  
578  
588  
Map  
554  
564  
574  
584  
559  
569  
579  
589  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the “dark” side becomes.  
Manual-density  
center value  
552  
562  
572  
582  
557  
567  
577  
587  
Manual-density  
“dark” step value  
Manual-density  
“light” step value  
560  
The larger the value, the lighter  
the “light” side becomes.  
570  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the “dark” side becomes.  
580  
Automatic density  
Manual-density  
center value  
555  
Manual-density  
“dark” step value  
Manual-density  
“light” step value  
565  
The larger the value, the lighter  
the “light” side becomes.  
575  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
585  
Automatic density  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Input the code of required mode (color mode, copy mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Input an adjustment value with digital keys (acceptable values: 0 to 255).  
(To correct an input value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value.The copier goes back to the standby  
state.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat the steps (2) to (5).  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 68  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 9 Color Balance Adjustment  
Copy mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Text/  
Remarks  
Printed  
image  
Text  
Photo  
Map  
photo  
779  
0
The larger the value,  
the darker the color to  
be adjuted becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0 to  
255  
Adjustment code  
Sub code  
780  
0
781  
0
782  
0
783  
0
Yellow  
Low density  
Medium density  
High density  
Magenta  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub code  
784  
0
785  
0
786  
0
787  
0
788  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High denisy  
Cyan  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub code  
789  
0
790  
0
791  
0
792  
0
793  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High denisy  
Black  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub code  
794  
0
795  
0
796  
0
797  
0
798  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High denisy  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “1.7 Automatic Adjustment of Gamma Correction”.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Input the code of required mode (color mode, copy mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] key.  
0 : Low density (L) 1 : Medium density (M) 2 : High density (H)  
(4) Input an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an input value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(5) Press the [SET] icon to have the value memorized. Returns to the display in (3).  
(6) For resetting the value, repeat the steps (3) to (5).  
(7) Press the [SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory.The copier goes back to  
the standby state.  
(8) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(9) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat the steps (2) to (8).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 69  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 10 Offset Amount for Processing Background  
The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.  
Copy mode  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
Color  
mode  
Printed  
image  
Text/photo  
698  
Text  
699  
709  
704  
714  
Photo  
701  
Map  
702  
712  
707  
717  
The larger the value, the darker  
the background becomes.  
The smaller the value, the  
darker the text becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the background becomes.  
The smaller the value, the  
darker the text becomes.  
Offset value for  
background  
Offset value for  
text  
700  
710  
705  
715  
708  
711  
Offset value for  
background  
Offset value for  
text  
703  
706  
713  
716  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Input the code of required mode (color mode, copy mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Input an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an input value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory.The copier goes back to  
the standby screen.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat the steps (2) to (5).  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 70  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 11 Judgment Threshold for ACS  
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is  
monochrome or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto color” is selected in  
the color mode.  
Code  
675  
Adjustment item  
Content  
Judgment threshold for ACS The larger the value, the more an original tends to be judged  
to be monochrome, and the smaller the value, the more it  
tends to be judged to be color.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 71  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 12 AI Mode Setting  
(a) AI mode discrimination setting  
Select the discrimination level in the AI mode as follows:  
Code  
678  
Adjustment item  
AI mode  
Discrimination setting  
Content  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the  
power.  
(2) Input code [678] with digital keys.  
(3) Input an appropriate setting value:  
0 : Standard (for regular)  
1 : Photograph priority  
2 : Only judgement of original type  
3 : Only judgement of original type with photograph pri-  
ority  
4 : No AI discrimination  
(4) Press [SET] icon or the [INTERRUPT] key to store the  
adjustment value.  
(b) AI mode time-out setting  
Set the maximum processing time allowable during the AI mode. Two kinds of setting are made, one for  
originals of A4 or smaller sizes, and the other for originals larger than A4.  
Note: In case discrimination does not finish, stop AI mode discrimination and copy in the selected copy mode.  
Code  
682  
Adjustment item  
AI mode  
Time-out setting  
Content  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the  
power.  
(2) Input code [682] with digital keys.  
(3) Input an appropriate setting value:  
The setting value should be two digits; the lower digit is  
the time-out period (seconds) for A4 original size, and  
should be in the range of 1 to 9. The upper digit is the  
time-out period for A3 original size, and should be in the  
range of 1 to 9. However, time is set in proportion to  
original sizes for originals larger than A4, based on A4  
or A3 setting value.  
(4) Press [SET] icon or the [INTERRUPT] key to store the  
setting value.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 72  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 13 Sharpness Adjustment  
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.The adjustment  
can be made for each of the color modes and image modes independently.  
Code  
730  
731  
732  
733  
734  
735  
736  
737  
738  
789  
740  
741  
742  
743  
744  
745  
Color mode  
Full color  
Copy mode  
Text/photo (text area)  
Text/photo (photo area)  
AI (text area)  
AI (photo area)  
Text  
Content  
• The larger the value, the sharper the image  
becomes; while the smaller the value, the softer the  
image becomes.  
• The smaller the value, the less moire tends to  
appear.  
Printed image  
Photo  
• The permissible range of values : 0 to 31.  
The center value is 16.  
Map  
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.  
Note: In the text/photo and AI modes, you can make  
adjustment for text area and photo area  
independently, but in the other modes, you  
have to make adjustment by compromising  
between moire and sharpness.  
Black  
Text/photo (text area)  
Text/photo (photo area)  
AI (text area)  
AI (photo area)  
Text  
Printed image  
Photo  
Map  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Input the code of required mode (color mode, copy mode, items to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Input an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an input value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] icon or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory.The copier goes back to  
the standby state.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat the steps (2) to (5).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 73  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.14 High-Voltage Transformer Settings  
1.14.1 Overview  
This machine uses four main high-voltage transformers for charging/development/discharging and one  
transfer transformer for transfer/suction.  
The main high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-M-310) are used each for one of the colors Y, M, C and K,  
giving a total of four units.  
The transfer transformer (PS-HVT-TB-310) supplies high-voltage for the transfer rollers Y, M, C and K  
and the suction charger to be used in black mode.  
The main high-voltage transformers have the following high-voltage outputs.  
CH1: main charger wire  
CH2: main charger grid bias  
CH3: developer bias  
CH4: cleaning blade bias  
The transfer transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.  
CH1: transfer roller bias (Y)  
CH2: transfer roller bias (M)  
CH3: transfer roller bias (C)  
CH4: transfer roller bias (K)  
CH5: suction charger  
* CH5 is used in black mode only.  
The main high-voltage transformer and transfer transformer for service parts are supplied with the data  
sheets to be used for the following setup. Be careful not to lose them.  
Output adjustment is performed when the devices are shipped, so under any circumstances, do not  
move the resistors fixed to the board.  
1.14.2 Settings after replacing main high-voltage transformers  
After replacing a main high-voltage transformer, input the data stated on the supplementary data sheet  
(main charger grid bias, developer bias) according to the procedure below without fail.  
<Settings for main charger grid bias>  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Input code 252 and press [START] key.  
The lower limit value for main charger grid bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(3) Input the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
(4) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(5) Input code [253] and press [START] key.  
The upper limit value for main charger grid bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(6) Input the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 74  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
< Settings for developer bias >  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Input code [257] and press [START] key.  
The lower limit value for developer bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(3) Input sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
(4) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(5) Input code [258] and press [START] key.  
The upper limit value for developer bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(6) Input the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
(7) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
1.14.3 Settings after replacing transfer transformer  
After replacing a transfer transformer, input the data shown on the supplementary data sheet (transfer  
bias) according to the procedure below without fail.  
<Settings for transfer roller bias>  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Input code [367] and press [START] key.  
The lower limit value for transfer bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(3) Input the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
(4) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet, and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT]  
key.  
* Perform the operation in (3) and (4) for each of Y, M, C and K.  
(5) Input code [368] and press [START] key.  
The upper limit value for transfer bias is displayed for each Y, M, C and K.  
(6) Input the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press [START] key.  
(7) Input a value according to the supplementary data sheet, and press either [SET] or [INTERRUPT]  
key.  
* Perform the operation in (6) and (7) for each of Y, M, C and K.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 75  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.15 Adjusting Doctor-to-Sleeve Gap  
Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig  
Adjusting procedure :  
(1) Remove the developer unit from the process-  
ing unit (EPU), and then remove the devel-  
oper unit cover and toner-scattering preven-  
tion seal holder from the developer unit.  
Developer unit  
cover  
Toner-scattering prevention  
seal holder  
(2) Loosen the 2 screws for fixing the doctor blade  
(M3), and insert the gauge “0.60” of the jig  
into the gap between the developer sleeve and  
the doctor blade to adjust the gap.  
Screws  
Doctor  
blade  
Fasten the screws for fixing the doctor blade  
after adjusting.  
Gauge “0.60” of the  
doctor-sleeve jig  
Developer sleeve  
(3) Insert the gauge “0.55” of the jig into the gap  
between the sleeve and the doctor, and make  
sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the  
front৏ৎrear direction. In addition, confirm  
that the gauge “0.65” cannot be inserted into  
the gap.  
Gauge “0.55” of the doctor-  
sleeve jig  
Note :  
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert the  
gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade.  
2. While reinstalling the toner-scattering prevention seal holder, make the slide hooks inserted securely.  
3. After reinstalling the toner-scattering prevention seal holder, make sure that each of the side mylar  
sheets (one each on the front and rear) is between the 2 urethane rubber sheets.  
4. While reinstalling the developer unit cover, make the latches fitted securely.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 76  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.16 Adjusting the Scanner Section  
1.16.1 Adjusting the Carriages  
(a) Installing carriage drive wires  
When replacing the carriage drive wires with new wires, proceed as illustrated below:  
Motor pulley  
2GT-Z26 (26 tooth)  
Carriage 2 pulley  
Carriage drive wire  
φ 20  
Carriage 2  
Carriage 1  
Scan motor  
Wire take-up pulley/motor speed reduction pulley  
Idler pulley  
φ 27.37/2GT-Z43  
φ 20  
(b) Adjusting the carriage drive wires  
Since the wires are applied with proper tension by tension springs, there is no need for tension  
adjustment.  
Note:  
Check that the wire tension is identical for both front and rear wires and is properly applied.  
(c) Adjusting the positions of carriages 1 and 2  
1. Loosen 2 screws (one each on the front and  
rear) which are fixing carriage 1 to the wires,  
and another 1 screw (on the front) which are  
fixing carriage 2 to the wires.  
Carriage jigs  
Carriage 1  
2. Move carriage 2 to the exit side. Insert the car-  
riage jigs into the jig-insertion holes, one each  
on the front and rear sides of carriage 2, and  
fasten the screw on the front side of carriage 2.  
3. While placing the protruding parts of carriage 1  
against the carriage jigs, fasten carriage 1 to  
the wire on both front and rear sides.  
Rear side  
Front side  
4. Pull out the carriage jigs.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 77  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(d) Installing the carriage drive wires to the wire pulleys  
Winding the wire to the wire pulleys:  
1. Fit the 3-mm ball terminal in the center of the  
wire into the hole in the wire pulley. The wire  
should be positioned so that the part of the wire  
with a hook on its crimped side be on the upper  
side.  
Ball terminal  
Wire pulley  
2. Wind the wires onto the wire pulleys on the front  
and rear. The number of turns to be wound are  
as follows (see the illustrations below):  
· One turn on the inside of the boss.  
· Six turns on the outside of the boss.  
After winding the wires on the pulleys, hold the  
wires with wire holder jigs to prevent them from  
unwinding.  
[Rear side]  
[Front side]  
Ball terminal  
1 turn  
Pulley (front)  
Boss  
1 turn  
Hook  
Pulley  
(rear)  
Ball terminal  
6 turns  
6 turns  
Hook  
Boss  
(Front)  
Wire pulley  
Hook  
Wires  
Ball terminals  
(Rear)  
Wire holder jig  
Wire pulley  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 78  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note :  
1. When winding the wires on the pulleys, take  
the following precautions:  
· Do not wind the wire on the pulley with  
the wire twisted.  
No gap should exist.  
· Wind the wire strongly so that all the turns  
of the wire are in firm contact with the  
surface of the pulley.  
e.g. Front side  
· Each time you wind a turn on the pulley,  
push it to the preceding turn so that all  
the turns are closely wound.  
2. When fitting wire holder jigs, take care so  
that the turns wound on the pulleys do not  
move or unwind.  
<Relationship between wound turns and wire holder jigs>  
3-mm dia.  
Front side  
Rear side  
ball terminal  
Wire holder jigs  
Pulley  
Wire holder jig  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 79  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.16.2 Lens Unit  
(a) Replacing the lens unit  
· Since the lens unit was precisely adjusted at the factory, it must not be readjusted in the field or some  
of its components must not be replaced. If necessary, the lens unit should be replaced as a unit.  
· While replacing with a new lens unit, never loosen or remove the six screws indicated with arrows  
below. They are locked with special paint.  
· Use sufficient care when handling the lens unit. Never hold the precision-adjusted area of the lens unit.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 80  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Adjusting the magnification ratio of the lens  
Note:  
Feeding direction  
1. The lens magnification ratio adjustment  
should be performed only when the lens  
unit is removed or replaced in the field.  
2. Before this adjustment, check that the pri-  
mary scanning reproduction ratio of the  
printer is corrected.  
Copied ruler  
Actual ruler  
1. Place a suitable ruler on the original glass and make a copy of it on A4(LT)-size paper at 100%  
reproduction ratio.  
2. Compare the copied ruler with the actual ruler to measure the error in the reproduction ratio.  
3. Make adjustment so that the distance between each mark of both rulers becomes equal, using the  
following procedure.  
Note:  
After this adjustment, be sure to perform CCD primary scanning deviation adjustment.  
<Adjustment procedure>  
(1) Remove the original glass, lens cover, damp heater unit and lens shield bracket.  
(2) Screw the 2 pins for lens magnification ratio adjustment into the 2 elongated holes in the lens base.  
Pins for lens magnification ratio  
adjustment  
Feed side  
Lens base  
Exit side  
(3) Loosen 2 screws for fixing the lens unit.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 81  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Using the marks on the scanner base as a guide, adjust the lens unit in either forward or backward  
direction.  
The following table shows the error in the reproduction ratio between the copies and actual rulers  
compared to be measured, and the amount of adjustment of the lens unit.  
Reproduction-ratio error Amount of adjustment  
0.1 %  
0.2 %  
0.3 %  
0.4 %  
0.5 %  
0.6 %  
0.7 %  
0.8 %  
0.9 %  
1.0 %  
0.5 mm  
0.9 mm  
1.4 mm  
1.9 mm  
2.4 mm  
2.9 mm  
3.3 mm  
3.8 mm  
4.3 mm  
4.8 mm  
Marking  
Adjustment  
direction  
For larger-  
than-100%  
ratios  
For smaller-  
than-100%  
ratios  
Exit side  
Lens unit  
Note:  
Feed side  
If the adjustment finer than that in the above table is required, perform “Fine adjustment of polygonal  
motor rotation speed”.  
(5) Install the lens cover and original glass, and then make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.  
(6) Remove the original glass and lens cover again, and then tighten the 2 screws for the lens unit to fix  
its position.  
(7) Remove the 2 pins used for adjusting the lens magnification ratio.  
(8) Reinstall the damp heater unit, lens shield bracket, lens cover and original glass.  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 82  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(C) Fixing the lens unit  
(1) Insert the positioning pins (front and rear) into the hole of the lens unit, and install to the scanner  
unit.  
note) As the shape of the front and rear differ, pay attention to this point when installing parts.  
(2) Fix the two oblong holes by two screws. (B: two points)  
B
B
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 82 - 1  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.17 Adjusting the Cassette for Sidewise Deviation  
(1) Loosen 5 screws for fixing the cassette front cover, and the sidewise deviation can be adjusted  
toward the front or the rear by a maximum of 3 mm.  
(2) If the copy image is shifted toward the rear of copy paper, adjust the front cover of the cassette  
toward the front by the amount of the shift, and fasten the screws.  
(3) If the copy image is shifted toward the front of copy paper, adjust the front cover of the cassette  
toward the rear by the amount of the shift, and fasten the screws.  
Left side  
Right side  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 83  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.18 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)  
To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the machine.  
Key copy counter  
MU-8  
Counter socket  
MU-10  
<Installation procedure>  
Socket attachment screw holes  
(1) Remove the rear cover.  
Harness  
(2) Remove the feed-side upper cover, and cut  
open the window for the key copy counter.  
(3) Pull out the harness connector from the hole  
in the machine frame, and cut the shorting har-  
ness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness  
properly to avoid it causing a short-circuit with  
the machine frame.) Then, disconnect the  
dummy connector.  
connector  
Dummy  
connector  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
1 - 84  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Connect the connector of the counter socket  
to the harness connector of the machine.  
(5) Install the counter socket to the machine frame  
with two M3 screws.  
Socket  
connector  
Connector of the  
machine  
M3 screws  
(6) Reinstall the feed-side upper cover and the  
rear cover.  
(7) Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark  
facing up and pointing toward the machine.  
(8) In the “08” setting mode, enter “3” under code  
202.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 85  
FC-22 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
2. 1 Types of Preventive Maintenance  
The following two types of preventive maintenance should be performed:  
(1) General maintenance  
General maintenance should be performed based on the value of the PM counter (08-857).  
This maintenance, which covers the black developer unit as well as the entire machine, should be  
conducted in conjunction with the replacement cycle (For FC-22: every 30K Copies, For FC-15:  
every 20K Copies) of the black developer material.  
(2) Color maintenance  
Color maintenance should be performed based on the value of the color PM counter (08-897).  
This maintenance, which is performed with a focus on the color developer units, should be con-  
ducted in conjunction with the replacement cycle of the color developer materials.  
FC-22: every 30K copies  
FC-15: every 20K copies  
The replacement cycle (counter value) of color maintenance is determined by the ratio of color copy  
to black copy, as shown by the following table, "Variation in PM cycles due to color/black output  
ratios".  
Variation in PM cycles due to color/black output ratios  
Monochrome  
modes  
0%  
FC-15  
FC-22  
Color modes  
PM (copies) Color PM (copies) PM (copies) Color PM (copies)  
100%  
90%  
80%  
70%  
60%  
50%  
20.0K  
20.0K  
20.0K  
20.0K  
20.0K  
20.0K  
20.0K  
22.2K  
25.0K  
28.5K  
33.3K  
40.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
30.0K  
33.3K  
37.5K  
42.9K  
50.0K  
60.0K  
10%  
20%  
30%  
40%  
50%  
* Therefore, replacing parts, cleaning and coating oil for the paper feeding unit, scanner unit, trans-  
fer/transport unit, fuser unit, all should be checked and maintained in conjunction with the replace-  
ment cycle of the black developer material.  
e.g. )Replacing fuser rollers  
: At the 3rd cycle of replacing black developer material  
(30K × 3 = 90K copies)  
Replacing the transfer belt : At the 4th cycle of replacing black developer material  
(30K × 4 = 120K copies)  
* For the details of maintenance items, refer to the checklist described later.  
* Yields are based on factory defaults.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 1  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. 2 Maintenance to be Performed  
FC-22: Every 30,000, 60,000, 90,000 and 120,000 Copies  
FC-15: Every 20,000, 40,000, 60,000 and 120,000 Copies  
(1) Preparation  
Discuss current machine conditions with the key operator and note them down.  
Before starting maintenance, make a few sample copies by TCC-1 chart and save them for  
later reference purposes.  
Turn OFF the power switch, and be sure to unplug the copier.  
(2) Perform preventive maintenance following the checklist shown below. During maintenance, refer to  
the illustrations attached and the Service Manual as required.  
(3) After having finished the maintenance, plug in the copier, turn ON the power switch, and make a few  
copies to confirm that the copier is working normally.  
2. 3 Preventive Maintenance Checklist  
Symbols used in the checklist (For FC-22)  
Cleaning  
Coating  
Replacing  
Operation check  
Z After cleaning  
or replacing,  
Date  
W
White grease 30 Every 30K copies  
User’s name  
Serial No.  
Inspector’s  
name  
A
Cleaning with alcohol  
Cleaning with soft pad,  
cloth or vacuum cleaner  
(Molycoat)  
AV Alvania No.2  
60 Every 60K copies  
90 Every 90K copies  
120 Every 120K  
copies  
Z
check for no  
abnormality.  
Remarks  
>
Replace if  
deformed or  
damaged  
Symbols used in the checklist (For FC-15)  
Cleaning  
Coating  
Replacing  
Operation check  
Z After cleaning  
or replacing,  
Date  
W
White grease 20 Every 20K copies  
User’s name  
Serial No.  
Inspector’s  
name  
A
Cleaning with alcohol  
Cleaning with soft pad,  
cloth or vacuum cleaner  
(Molycoat)  
AV Alvania No.2  
40 Every 40K copies  
60 Every 60K copies  
120 Every 120K copies  
Z
check for no  
abnormality.  
>
Replace if  
deformed or  
damaged  
Remarks  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Maintenance Checklist  
FC-22  
Replace every Operation Remarks  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning  
Coating  
1K copies  
check  
<P-1>  
1. Developer material  
2. Doctor blade  
30  
9  
1  
10  
2  
Z(30/60)  
Z(60)  
>
>
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
Z(60)  
AV  
6. Cleaning blade  
60  
3  
<P23-I13>  
7. Recovery blade  
Z(60)  
>
>
4  
8. Felt seals on both ends of the cleaning blade Z(60)  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
10. Main charger case  
11. Dischiarge LED  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
8  
7  
Processing  
unit (EPU)  
(Only Black  
related parts)  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
60  
60  
Z
<P22-I21>  
7  
<P22-I15>  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
60  
60  
<P22-I24>  
Z(60)  
5  
<P22-I38>  
17. Drum shaft  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
18. Drum thermister  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
20. Toner cartridge drive gear  
21. Ozone filter  
W
W
60  
30  
6  
<P6-I37>  
Around-EPU  
area  
22. Toner bag  
Key-operator’s  
item  
<P33-I33>  
23. Upper fuser roller  
24. Lower fuser roller  
25. Separation fingers  
26. Upper oil roller  
90  
90  
90  
30  
30  
90  
90  
11  
<P27-I17>  
12  
<P27-I4>  
14  
<P28-I31>  
13  
<P28-I56>  
27. Upper cleaning roller  
28. Lower oil roller  
13  
<P28-I57>  
Fuser unit  
13  
<P28-I11>  
29. Lower cleaning roller  
13  
<P28-I12>  
30. Upper thermistors  
31. Lower thermistors  
32. Fuser roller inlet guide  
33. Fuser roller exit guide  
34. Paper exit roller  
A(30)  
A(30)  
A(90)  
A(90)  
A
>
>
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 3  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FC-22  
Remarks  
<P-1>  
Replace every Operation  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning Coating  
1K copies  
check  
Image quality 35. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
Z(60)  
Color  
36. Color registration sensor  
Z(60)  
registration  
Laser unit  
37. Slit glass  
Z(60)  
38. Pick-up roller  
39. Feed roller  
90  
>
<P14-I13>  
40. Separation roller  
41. Bypass pick-up roller  
>
90  
<P17-I32>  
<P17-I10>  
Paper feeding 42. Bypass feed roller  
system  
43. Bypass separation pad  
44. Registration roller  
45. Paper guide  
A
A
90>  
>
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
W
>
46. Paper dust brush  
47. Paper feeding system drive gears (tooth face)  
48. Registration unit support bushings  
49. Original glass  
>
W
Z(60)or A  
Z(60)or A  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
50. Platen cover  
51. Mirror 1  
52. Mirror 2  
53. Mirror 3  
Scanner  
54. Reflector  
55. Lens  
56. Exposure lamp  
>
Z
Z
Z
57. Original-width indicator  
58. Automatic original detection unit  
59. Slide sheet  
>
60. Air filter  
Z(60)  
>
61. Transfer belt  
120  
120  
120  
120  
<P30-I2>  
<P30-I22>  
<P30-I27>  
<P30-I46>  
62. Transfer roller (Y, M, C, K)  
63. Drive roller cleaning felt  
Transfer/  
transport unit 64. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
(TBU)  
65. Transfer belt recovery blade  
66. Transfer belt drive roller  
67. Transfer belt driven roller  
Z(120)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
>
>
Notes: 1.<P-I> in the “Remarks” column indicates a page item in the Parts List.  
2.The replacement cycle of each supply item of a particular paper feeding system corresponds with the  
maximum number of sheets specified for the paper feed source.  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Maintenance Checklist  
FC-22  
Replace every Operation Remarks  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning  
Coating  
1K copies  
check  
<P-1>  
1. Developer material (Y, M, C)  
2. Doctor blade  
30  
9  
1  
10  
2  
Z(30/60)  
Z(60)  
>
>
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
Z(60)  
AV  
6. Cleaning blade  
60  
3  
<P23-I13>  
7. Recovery blade  
Z(60)  
>
>
4  
8. Felt seals on both ends of the cleaning blade Z(60)  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
10. Main charger case  
11. Dischiarge LED  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
8  
7  
Processing  
unit (EPU)  
(Color (Y, M,  
C) related  
parts)  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
60  
60  
Z
<P22-I21>  
7  
<P22-I15>  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
60  
60  
<P22-I24>  
Z(60)  
5  
<P22-I38>  
17. Drum shaft  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
18. Drum thermister  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
W
Image quality 35. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
Color  
36. Color registration sensor  
Z(60)  
registration  
Laser unit  
37. Slit glass  
Z(60)  
Note: 1.<P-I> in the “Remarks” column indicates a page item in the Parts List.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 5  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Maintenance Checklist  
FC-15  
Replace every Operation Remarks  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning  
Coating  
1K copies  
check  
<P-1>  
1. Developer material (Y, M, C)  
2. Doctor blade  
20  
9  
1  
10  
2  
Z(20/40)  
Z(40)  
>
>
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
Z(40)  
AV  
6. Cleaning blade  
40  
3  
<P23-I13>  
7. Recovery blade  
Z(40)  
>
>
4  
8. Felt seals on both ends of the cleaning blade Z(40)  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
10. Main charger case  
11. Dischiarge LED  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
8  
7  
Processing  
unit (EPU)  
(Only Black)  
related  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
40  
40  
Z
<P22-I21>  
7  
parts)  
<P22-I15>  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
40  
40  
<P22-I24>  
Z(40)  
5  
<P22-I38>  
17. Drum shaft  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
18. Drum thermister  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
20. Toner cartridge drive gear  
21. Ozone filter  
W
W
Processing  
unit Around  
EPU area  
40  
30  
6  
<P6-I37>  
22. Toner bag  
Key-operator’s  
item  
<P33-I33>  
23. Upper fuser roller  
24. Lower fuser roller  
25. Separation fingers  
26. Upper oil roller  
60  
60  
60  
20  
20  
60  
60  
11  
<P27-I17>  
12  
<P27-I4>  
14  
<P28-I31>  
13  
<P28-I56>  
27. Upper cleaning roller  
28. Lower oil roller  
13  
<P28-I57>  
Fuser unit  
13  
<P28-I11>  
29. Lower cleaning roller  
13  
<P28-I12>  
30. Upper thermistors  
31. Lower thermistors  
32. Fuser roller inlet guide  
33. Fuser roller exit guide  
34. Paper exit roller  
A(20)  
A(20)  
A(60)  
A(60)  
A
>
>
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 5 - 1  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FC-15  
Remarks  
<P-1>  
Replace every Operation  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning Coating  
1K copies  
check  
Image quality 35. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
Z(40)  
Color  
36. Color registration sensor  
Z(40)  
registration  
Laser unit  
37. Slit glass  
Z(40)  
38. Pick-up roller  
39. Feed roller  
90  
>
<P14-I13>  
40. Separation roller  
41. Bypass pick-up roller  
>
90  
<P17-I32>  
<P17-I10>  
Paper feeding 42. Bypass feed roller  
system  
43. Bypass separation pad  
44. Registration roller  
45. Paper guide  
A
A
90>  
>
Z(40)  
Z(20)  
W
>
46. Paper dust brush  
47. Paper feeding system drive gears (tooth face)  
48. Registration unit support bushings  
49. Original glass  
>
W
Z(40)or A  
Z(40)or A  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
50. Platen cover  
51. Mirror 1  
52. Mirror 2  
53. Mirror 3  
Scanner  
54. Reflector  
55. Lens  
56. Exposure lamp  
>
Z
Z
Z
57. Original-width indicator  
58. Automatic original detection unit  
59. Slide sheet  
>
>
60. Air filter  
Z(40)  
61. Transfer belt  
120  
120  
120  
120  
>
<P30-I2>  
<P30-I22>  
<P30-I27>  
<P30-I46>  
62. Transfer roller (Y, M, C, K)  
63. Drive roller cleaning felt  
Transfer/  
transport unit 64. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
(TBU)  
65. Transfer belt recovery blade  
66. Transfer belt drive roller  
67. Transfer belt driven roller  
Z(120)  
Z(60)  
Z(60)  
>
>
Notes: 1.<P-I> in the “Remarks” column indicates a page item in the Parts List.  
2.The replacement cycle of each supply item of a particular paper feeding system corresponds with the  
maximum number of sheets specified for the paper feed source.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 5 - 2  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Maintenance Checklist  
FC-15  
Replace every Operation Remarks  
Section  
Item to inspect  
Cleaning  
Coating  
1K copies  
check  
<P-1>  
1. Developer material (Y, M, C)  
2. Doctor blade  
20  
9  
1  
10  
2  
Z(20/40)  
Z(40)  
>
>
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
Z(40)  
AV  
6. Cleaning blade  
40  
3  
<P23-I13>  
7. Recovery blade  
Z(40)  
>
>
4  
8. Felt seals on both ends of the cleaning blade Z(40)  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
10. Main charger case  
11. Dischiarge LED  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
8  
7  
Processing  
unit (EPU)  
(Color (Y, M,  
C) related  
parts)  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
40  
40  
Z
<P22-I21>  
7  
<P22-I15>  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
40  
40  
<P22-I24>  
Z(40)  
5  
<P22-I38>  
17. Drum shaft  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
Z(40)  
18. Drum thermister  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
W
Image quality 35. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
Color  
36. Color registration sensor  
Z(40)  
registration  
Laser unit  
37. Slit glass  
Z(40)  
Note: 1.<P-I> in the “Remarks” column indicates a page item in the Parts List.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 5 - 3  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Processing unit (EPU)]  
(See next page)  
5352 51 54 56 57 49 58 59 35, 36 58 55  
37  
60  
21  
46  
44  
42  
41  
30  
23  
25  
33  
34  
43  
45  
25  
24  
31  
28  
29  
44, 48  
46  
67  
39  
40  
38  
38  
39  
40  
65  
66  
22  
64 63  
62 61  
[Front sectional view]  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 6  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 13  
12 10, 15  
11 13  
12 10, 15  
11 13  
12 10, 15  
11 13  
12 10, 15  
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3, 18  
3, 18  
3, 18  
3, 18  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
Developer unit K  
Developer unit C  
Developer unit M  
Developer unit Y  
[Processing unit (EPU)]  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 7  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
47  
[Front-side drive system]  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 8  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* Notes on the Preventive Maintenance Checklist  
1. Doctor blade cleaning  
(a) Cleaning every 30K  
Note: This cleaning should be done prior to “automatic removing of developer material”.  
(1) Open the front covers, and turn the lever to  
the right to make the transfer belt unit move  
down.  
(2) Remove the toner cartridges (Y, M, C, K).  
(3) Remove the processing unit (EPU) and place  
it on a flat table.  
Note: Make sure there are no projections or parts  
such as screws on the table.  
(4) Pull out the drum thermistor.  
(5) Disengage 4 latches of the developer unit  
cover gently and lift the cover up slowly.  
Note: Be careful not to allow the developer mate-  
rial deposited on the back of the cover to  
drop into different-color developer units. (To  
avoid this problem, put paper over the other  
developer units not being cleaned now.)  
(6) Insert the doctor blade cleaning jig between  
the doctor blade and the sleeve, and move  
the jig along the blade edge back and forth;  
make 3 return movements to clean the doctor  
blade.  
(7) Reinstall the developer unit cover and the  
drum thermistor.  
(8) Do steps (4) to (7) for developer unit K or units  
Y, M and C.  
(9) Reinstall the EPU into the machine, and raise  
the transfer belt unit.  
(10) Perform the automatic removing of developer  
material (adjustment mode 05-392:K, 391:Y,  
M, C).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 9  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Cleaning every 60K (which should be give priority when coincides with every-30K cleaning)  
Note: This cleaning should be done subsequent to “automatic removing of developer material”.  
(1) Move the developer removal shutter lever in  
the direction of the arrow shown to close the  
developer removal opening.  
(2) Remove the developer unit from the EPU.  
(3) Remove the developer unit cover. Insert the  
doctor blade cleaning jig between the doctor  
blade and the sleeve and move the jig back  
and forth; make 3 return movements to clean  
the doctor blade.  
(4) After the cleaning, return the developer re-  
moval shutter lever to open the developer re-  
moval opening (move the lever in a direction  
reverse to (1)).  
(5) Making the developer removal opening point  
downward, remove the developer material re-  
maining in the developer unit. (Shake the de-  
veloper unit to the right and left, and rotate  
the mixer and the sleeve alternately.)  
Developer material  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 10  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Front/rear sides of developer unit  
Clean off any toner accumulating on the developer sleeve ends indicated with arrows and in the  
area beneath the scattered toner recovery roller.  
3 Cleaning blade  
If poor cleaning has occurred due to such causes as adhesion of paper dust, etc. prior to the  
specified number of copies for replacement, replace the cleaning blade as required because the  
blade edge may have been damaged.  
4 Recovery blade  
If the blade edge has been marred, replace the blade regardless of the number of copies that have  
been made so far.  
5 Drum  
Refer to “3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Photoconductive Drums”.  
6 Ozone filter  
If the ozone filter is heavily dirty, replace it.  
7 Main charger case and charger wire  
To clean the inside of the main charger case and the charger wire, use a cloth which should be  
soaked in water and then wrung lightly.  
8 Developer unit and cleaner unit  
Check if the outside surfaces including the bottom surfaces are dirty, and clean if necessary.  
9 Developer material  
When the developer material is replaced, be sure to perform "automatic adjustment of the auto-  
toner circuit" (adjustment mode 05-200, 204, 221).  
10 Drum seal  
Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung strongly to clean the front seal.  
11 Upper fuser roller  
Refer to “3.5 Checking and Cleaning of the Fuser rollers”.  
12 Lower fuser roller  
13 Oil roller and cleaning roller  
Refer to “3.4 Checking and Replacing of the Oil Roller and Cleaning Roller of fuser section”.  
14 Separation fingers  
Replace any finger if its tip is damaged, regardless of the specified number of copies for replace-  
ment. If toner is fused tightly on the tip of fingers, the tip may be damaged if you try to scrape the  
toner off forcefully. So, replace any fingers that are heavily dirty with toner.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 11  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. 4 PM Kit  
FC-22  
No. of copies for  
replacement cycle  
Kit name  
Classification of kits  
Part name  
Q'ty  
1. Developer material (Y)  
1. Developer material (M)  
1. Developer material (C)  
1. Developer material (K)  
26. Upper oil roller (fuser unit)  
27. Upper cleaning roller (fuser unit)  
– Doctor blade cleaning jig  
6. Cleaning blade  
PS-ZDFC22Y  
PS-ZDFC22M  
PS-ZDFC22C  
PS-ZDFC22K  
SR-FC22H  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
9
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
DEV-KIT-FC22  
(30K kit)  
30K  
B-FC22H  
JIG-CLEAN-DOC  
BL-FC22D  
12. Charger wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
WIRE-CH-310  
K-PAD-WIRE  
GRID-CH-310  
K-FILTER-OZN  
HR-FC22-U  
HR-FC22-L  
EPU-KIT-FC22  
(60K kit)  
60K  
14. Main charger grid  
21. Ozone filter  
23. Upper fuser roller  
24. Lower fuser roller  
FU-KIT-FC22  
(90K kit)  
25. Separation finger  
SCRAPER-PR  
SR-FC22L  
90K  
28. Lower oil roller  
29. Lower cleaning roller  
B-FC22L  
38. Pick-up roller (cassette feed section) K-ROL-PICK-310  
61. Transfer belt  
TBU-KIT-FC22 62. Transfer roller  
(120K kit) 63. Drive roller cleaning felt  
64. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
BT-FC22TR  
CR-FC22TR  
FP-FC22TR  
BL-FC22TR  
120K  
* The numbers in the “Classification of kits” column above correspond with the numbers in the  
Preventive Maintenance Checklist.  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
2 - 12  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM Kit  
FC-15  
No. of copies for  
replacement cycle  
Kit name  
Classification of kits  
Part name  
Q'ty  
1. Developer material (Y)  
1. Developer material (M)  
1. Developer material (C)  
1. Developer material (K)  
26. Upper oil roller (fuser unit)  
27. Upper cleaning roller (fuser unit)  
– Doctor blade cleaning jig  
6. Cleaning blade  
PS-ZDFC22Y  
PS-ZDFC22M  
PS-ZDFC22C  
PS-ZDFC22K  
SR-FC22H  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
9
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
DEV-KIT-FC22  
(20K kit)  
20K  
B-FC22H  
JIG-CLEAN-DOC  
BL-FC22D  
12. Charger wire cleaning pad  
13. Main charger wire  
WIRE-CH-310  
K-PAD-WIRE  
GRID-CH-310  
K-FILTER-OZN  
HR-FC22-U  
HR-FC22-L  
EPU-KIT-FC22  
(40K kit)  
40K  
14. Main charger grid  
21. Ozone filter  
23. Upper fuser roller  
24. Lower fuser roller  
FU-KIT-FC22  
(60K kit)  
25. Separation finger  
SCRAPER-PR  
SR-FC22L  
60K  
28. Lower oil roller  
29. Lower cleaning roller  
B-FC22L  
39. Pick-up roller (cassette feed section) K-ROL-PICK-310  
61. Transfer belt  
TBU-KIT-FC22 62. Transfer roller  
(120K kit) 63. Drive roller cleaning felt  
64. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
BT-FC22TR  
CR-FC22TR  
FP-FC22TR  
BL-FC22TR  
120K  
* The numbers in the “Classification of kits” column above correspond with the numbers in the  
Preventive Maintenance Checklist.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 12 - 1  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. 5 List of Adjustment Tools  
Parts List  
Name  
Page  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
Item  
Door switch keep-on jig  
Wire holder jig  
1
2
4
8
5
ROM writer adapter 1  
ROM writer adapter 2  
Area sheet (grid-patterned sheet which  
facilitates the reading of values on  
X-Y coordinates in trimming and  
masking modes)  
Doctor blade - sleeve gap adjustment jig  
Doctor blade cleaning jig  
Cleaning brush  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
3
7
6
Test chart (No. TCC-1)  
9
Scanner carriage jig  
10  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 13  
FC-22 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES  
3.1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies  
A.Toner and Developer  
Toner and developer should be stored in a shaded place where the ambient temperature is between 10  
to 35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.  
B. Photoconductive Drum  
Like toner and developer, Photoconductive drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient  
temperature is between 10 to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be  
subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.  
C. Drum Cleaning Blade  
This item should be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface where the ambient temperature is between 10  
to 35°C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.  
D. Fuser Roller  
Avoid places where the fuser rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.  
E. Cleaning Roller  
Avoid places where the felt roller may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas. It  
should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.  
F. Copy Paper  
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.  
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.  
3.2 Checking and Cleaning of the Photoconductive Drum  
(1) Use of Gloves  
If fingerprints or oil stain the OPC drum surface, the characteristics of the photoconductor may degrade,  
affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare hands.  
(2) Handling Precautions  
As the OPC drum surface is very delicate, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and  
removing it so as not to damage its surface.  
When the drum is replaced with a new one, be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire  
surface of the new drum before installing. After installing, the drum counter must be cleared to 0 (zero) by  
operating the setting mode 840 – 843 and 867 – 870.  
Note:  
1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and the cleaning blade.  
If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and the cleaning blade may be damaged.  
2. When some fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in  
addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the  
blade.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 1  
FC-22 SUPPLIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Installation of the Copier and Storage of the Drum  
Avoid installing the copier where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/  
or chemical gas.  
Do not leave drums in a brightly lit place for a long time. Otherwise, the drum will be fatigued, producing  
some background fog on the copy after being installed in the machine. However, this effect will decrease  
as time elapses.  
(4) Cleaning the Drum  
At periodic maintenance calls, wipe softly the entire surface of the drum using the designated cleaning  
cotton (dry soft pad). Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton so as not to touch the drum surface inadvert-  
ently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning work to  
prevent accidental damage to the drum.  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or silicone oil as they will have an adverse effect on the  
drum. Never use selenium refresher, either.  
(5) Scratches on Photoconductive Drum Surface  
If the surface is scratched to such a degree that the aluminum base is exposed, black spots or streaks will  
be produced on copy images and can also damage the cleaning blade. So, replace the drum with a new  
one.  
(6) Collecting Used Photoconductive Drums  
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used OPC drums, you should follow your relevant local regula-  
tions and rules.  
3.3 Checking and Cleaning of the Drum Cleaning Blade andTransfer Belt Clean-  
ing Blade  
(1) Handling Precautions  
Since the edge of the cleaning blade performs the cleaning operation, pay special attention when han-  
dling it:  
Do not allow any hard object to hit or rub against the blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth  
or soft pad.  
Do not stain the edge with any oil or fingerprints, etc.  
Do not allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch the blade.  
Do not leave any lint or dirt on the blade edge.  
Do not place the blade near a heat source.  
(2) Cleaning Procedure  
Clean the blade edge lightly with a cloth moistened with water.  
FC-22 SUPPLIES  
3 - 2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Checking and Replacing the Oil Roller and Cleaning Roller of Fuser Section  
(1) Handling Precautions  
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the cleaning roller.  
(2) Defective Cleaning and Corrective Treatment  
Judgement should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser roller sur-  
face. When its surface is stained with toner, examine the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily  
adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/cleaning  
rollers should be replaced with new ones.  
The oil/cleaning rollers will be gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser roller over  
a long period of time. Replace them preferably after a fixed amount of copies have been made.  
3.5 Checking and Cleaning of the Fuser Rollers  
(1) Handling Precautions  
Upper and lower fuser rollers  
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the upper and lower fuser rollers.  
Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser rollers, or they may be  
damaged, possibly resulting in defective cleaning.  
(2) Checking  
Check for stain and damage on the fuser rollers and clean if necessary.  
Clean the separation claws and check for chipped claw tips.  
Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.  
Check the thermistor for proper contact with the fuser roller.  
Check the fused condition of the toner image.  
Check the gap between the inlet guide and lower fuser roller.  
Check the fuser rollers for proper rotation.  
(3) Cleaning Procedure for Fuser Rollers  
When fuser rollers become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the roller surface clean  
with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the rollers while they are still warm.  
Note:  
Be careful not to rub the fuser roller surface with your fingernails or hard objects because it can be easily  
damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser rollers.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 3  
FC-22 SUPPLIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt  
(1) Handling Precautions  
Do not touch the belt surface with your bare hands.  
Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the belt surface.  
Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to come into contact with the transfer belt.  
Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.  
3.7 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Roller  
(1) Handling Precautions  
Do not touch the transfer roller surface with your bare hands.  
Be carefull not to leave any scratch or dent on the transfer roller surface.  
FC-22 SUPPLIES  
3 - 4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING  
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS>  
The ID for each machine is registered on the LGC board, the IMC board and the SIC board.  
So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time.  
If more than one of the LGC board, the IMC board and the SIC board require replacement,  
replace them in the following procedure.  
1. First, replace one of the boards to be replaced.  
2.Turn the power ON and confirm that “READY” is displayed.  
3.Turn the power OFF.  
4. Replace another board that requires replacement.  
5. Repeat the steps 2. to 3.  
* If more than one of the LGC board, the IMC board and the SIC board are replaced at the  
same time, the error code “C9E” might be displayed.  
4.1 Troubleshooting Based on Error Code  
4.1.1 Paper transport jam inside the copier  
E01 Paper leading edge not reaching the exit sensor  
E02 Paper trailing edge not passing the exit sensor  
Is the fuser motor rotating?  
YES  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the exit sensor open-circuited?  
Is the paper exit sensor the connector or the connector J122 on the LGC board  
disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the exit sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the fuser motor open-circuited?  
Is the fuser motor connector or the connector J117 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the fuser motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 1  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where was the paper stopped?  
Near the exit sensor (paper not damaged)  
Is the registration sensor functioning properly? (Does its actuator return  
smoothly?)  
YES  
1. Check the test mode 03 and see if the registration sensor is  
valid.  
2. Reconnect the registration sensor connector.  
NO  
Repair if the actuator is displaced.  
Before reaching the fuser unit  
Did the paper stop, curling upward excessively?  
YES  
Replace the paper in the cassette.  
From on the transfer belt up to the exit sensor  
Do the size of paper and the size plate indication match?  
NO  
Make the sizes match.  
YES  
Is the transfer belt moving?  
(To C37 )  
E03 Paper remaining inside the copier at power ON  
Is any paper remaining inside the copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Refer to E01 , E02 and E11 to E26 .  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.2 Paper feeding jam  
E11 Paper misfeed from the ADU  
Is any paper remaining in the paper feed area inside the ADU unit?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J103 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU unit.  
E12 Paper misfeed from the bypass  
Is any paper set in the bypass tray?  
YES  
Does the paper remain within the specified paper weight and stack height ?  
YES  
Is there any foreign matter such as scrap of paper in the paper  
transport path from the bypass feed section up to the registration  
rollers?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Eliminate the foreign matter.  
NO  
Check if the bypass pick-up roller, bypass feed roller or separa-  
tion pad is not deteriorated. Replace them if necessary.  
Adjust the paper weight and stack height to follow the specification.  
Does the bypass paper sensor work? Does the actuator return normally?  
1. Use the test mode to confirm that the bypass paper sensor is working nor-  
YES  
mally.  
2. Reconnect the bypass paper sensor connector.  
NO  
Repair the actuator if it is displaced.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 3  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E13 Paper misfeed from the 1st cassette  
E14 Paper misfeed from the 2nd cassette  
E15 Paper misfeed from the 3rd cassette  
E16 Paper misfeed from the 4th cassette  
Open the side door; does any paper remain in the paper path from the cassette?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette-feed jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette-feed jam sensor connector or the connector J107 on the LGC board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette-feed jam sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
E19 Paper misfeed from the LCF  
Open the side door; does any paper remain in the paper path from the LCF?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette-feed jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette-feed jam sensor connector or the connector J107 on the LGC board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette-feed jam sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.3 Paper transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor after feeding)  
E21 Paper transport jam from the LCF  
E22 Paper transport jam from the 1st cassette  
E23 Paper transport jam from the 2nd cassette  
E24 Paper transport jam from the 3rd cassette  
E25 Paper transport jam from the 4th cassette  
Open the side door; does any paper remain in the paper path up to the registration roller?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette-feed jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the registration sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette-feed jam sensor connector, registration sensor connector, or the connectors  
J107 or J108 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette-feed jam sensor or the registration sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 5  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.4 Cover open jam  
E41 Front cover opened during copying  
* To avoid electrical hazards, the following checks must be made after unplugging the power  
cord.  
Is the front cover or the paper exit unit open?  
YES  
Close the front cover or the paper exit unit.  
NO  
Is the AC harness between the main switch, front cover switch, paper-exit unit switch and  
switching power supply open-circuited?  
Is any of the faston terminals (front cover switch, paper-exit unit switch, main switch) and the  
connector J709 of the switching power supply disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the disconnected faston terminal or connector. Replace the defective  
harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the front cover switch or the paper-exit unit switch.  
2. Replace the main switch.  
3. Replace the switching power supply.  
E42 Side door opened during copying  
Is the side door open?  
YES  
Close the side door.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the side door open/close switch open-circuited?  
Is the side door open/close switch connector or the connector J107 on the LGC board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the side door open/close switch.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 6  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E43 ADU unit pulled out during copying  
Is the ADU unit mounted securely on the copier?  
NO  
Mount the ADU unit securely to the copier.  
YES  
Is connector J103 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU unit.  
E45 LCF jam access cover opened during copying  
Is the LCF jam access cover open?  
YES  
Close the LCF jam access cover.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit open-circuited?  
Is the relay connector of the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit or the connector  
J105 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the LCF unit.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 7  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E46 Bypass unit opened during copying  
Is the bypass unit open?  
YES  
Close the bypass unit.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the bypass unit open/close switch open-circuited?  
Is the bypass unit open/close switch connector or the connector J107 on the LGC board dis-  
connected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the bypass unit open/close switch.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
4.1.5 Paper jam in ADU and reversing area  
E50 Paper not reaching the ADU  
E51 Paper not restarting from the ADU stack  
E54 ADU paper transport jam  
Is the ADU unit mounted securely on the copier?  
NO  
Mount the ADU unit securely to the copier.  
YES  
Is the connector J103 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU unit.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 8  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E52 Paper not reaching the ADU path sensor  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU path sensor open-circuited?  
Is the ADU path sensor connector or the connector J122 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the ADU path sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 9  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.6 Original jam in the RADF  
E71 Original not reaching the aligning sensor  
E72 Original not reaching the exit sensor  
E73 Original not passing the exit sensor  
E75 Second original not reaching the aligning sensor in 2-in-1 mode  
E79 Prefeed jam  
[Two or more originals are fed simultaneously.]  
Have too many originals been placed?  
YES  
Reset the originals, following the specification.  
NO  
Are the original sheets curled or folded too much?  
YES  
Flatten and reset the originals.  
NO  
Are different-size originals placed together?  
YES  
Set only one-size originals.  
NO  
Is the gap between the aligning plate and the feed roller too large?  
YES  
Adjust the gap.  
NO  
Is the separation pad stained?  
YES  
Clean the separation pad.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 10  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[The original does not reach the aligning roller.]  
Is the pick-up roller or feed roller stained?  
YES  
Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the gap between the aligning plate and the feed roller too small?  
YES  
Adjust the gap.  
NO  
Is the transporting force of the pick-up roller or the feed roller insufficient?  
YES  
Replace the rollers.  
[The original stops, skewed on the original glass.]  
Is the aligning roller stained?  
YES  
Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the transport belt stained?  
YES  
Clean the belt.  
NO  
Is the RADF correctly installed?  
NO  
Properly install the RADF in parallel to the copier.  
Make sure that the skew and height are properly adjusted.  
[The side edges of the original are out of alignment with the side edges of the copy.]  
Is the slides set too wide in relation to the width of the original?  
YES  
Align the slides with the width of the original.  
NO  
Shift the original feeding tray back or forth to adjust.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 11  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.7 Paper jam in the sorter  
EA1 Paper transport delay jam  
Is there any bur, scratch or foreign matter on the paper transport path?  
NO  
YES  
Remove any bur, scratch or foreign matter.  
Is the transport roller stained?  
NO  
YES  
Clean the transport roller.  
Are both non-sort paper sensor (PI4) and sort paper sensor (PI5) working normally?  
NO  
Replace any faulty sensor.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller PC board.  
EA2 Paper transport stop jam  
Is there any bur, scratch or foreign matter on the paper transport path?  
YES  
Remove any bur, scratch or foreign matter.  
NO  
Is the transport roller stained?  
YES  
Clean the transport roller.  
NO  
Are both non-sort paper sensor (PI4) and sort paper sensor (PI5) working normally?  
NO  
Replace any faulty sensor.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller PC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 12  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EA3 Paper remaining on the sorter transport path at power ON  
Is there any dirt or foreign matter around the non-sort paper sensor (PI4) or the sort paper  
sensor (PI5)?  
NO  
YES  
Remove any dirt or foreign matter.  
Are both non-sort paper sensor (PI4) and sort paper sensor (PI5) working normally?  
NO  
YES  
Replace any faulty sensor.  
Replace the sorter controller PC board.  
EA4 Sorter front door opened during copying  
Is the stapler unit cover securely closed?  
NO  
Close the cover securely.  
YES  
Is the sorter securely mounted on the copier?  
NO  
Mount the sorter securely onto the copier.  
YES  
Is the feed guide securely closed?  
NO  
Close the feed guide securely.  
YES  
Are the stapler cover open/close switch (MS5), joint switch (MS1) and feed guide open/close  
switch (MS10) all working normally?  
NO  
Replace any faulty switch.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller PC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 13  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EA5 Staple jam  
Is there any jammed staple or foreign matter in the stapling area of the stapler unit?  
NO  
YES  
Remove any jammed staple or foreign matter.  
Is there any mar or damage in the stapling area?  
YES  
Replace the stapler unit.  
NO  
Replace the sorter controller PC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 14  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.8 Special sheet jam  
EC2 OHP sheets used except from bypass and 2nd cassette  
Use the 2nd cassette or the bypass as the feeding source of OHP sheets.  
EC3 OHP sheet used in non-OHP mode  
Set the specified type of paper as selected on the control panel in the paper source.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 15  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.9 Drive system related service call  
C05 ADU motor rotation abnormal  
Is the ADU motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector  
is open-circuited.  
2. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the ADU drawer  
connector is open-circuited.  
YES  
3. Check if any of the connectors J101, J102 and J103 on the LGC board is  
disconnected.  
4. Reduce the mechanical load on the motor by adjusting the drive system.  
Remove foreign matter if any.  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
Are the pins B2 and B4 of the connector J103 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
1. Check if the connector J103 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
NO  
2. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
YES  
3. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
4. Replace the LGC board.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 16  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C09 Black developer motor rotation abnormal  
Is the black developer motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the connectors CN1 or CN2 of the black developer motor is discon-  
nected.  
2. Check if the connector J108 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J703 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the black developer motor  
is open-circuited.  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the black de-  
veloper motor is open-circuited.  
YES  
6. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, counterclockwise as seen from its back, and if  
the motor load is abnormal, remove any foreign matter from the drive unit.  
(Do not try to rotate the motor clockwise as seen from its back.)  
8. Replace the black developer motor.  
9. Replace the LGC board.  
Are the pins B12 and B15 of the connector J108 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector CN2 of the black developer motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J108 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
YES  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
6. Replace the black developer motor.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the black developer motor.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 17  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C0A Color developer motor rotation abnormal  
Is the color developer motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector CN1 or CN2 of the color developer motor is discon-  
nected.  
2. Check if the connector J108 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J703 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color developer motor  
is open-circuited.  
YES  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the color de-  
veloper motor is open-circuited.  
6. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, counterclockwise as seen from its back, and if  
the motor load is abnormal, remove any foreign matter from the drive unit.  
(Do not try to rotate the motor clockwise as seen from its back.)  
8. Replace the color developer motor.  
9. Replace the LGC board.  
Are the pins A12 and A15 of the connector J108 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J41 of the color developer motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J108 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
YES  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
6. Replace the color developer motor.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the color developer motor.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 18  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C0B Drum motor K rotation abnormal  
C0C Drum motor C rotation abnormal  
C0D Drum motor M rotation abnormal  
C0E Drum motor Y rotation abnormal  
*
Before performing the following checks, be sure to place the transfer belt unit in a lowered position;  
otherwise, the drums and the transfer belt would be damaged when you rotate the drum motor.  
Is the drum motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the drum motor connector CN1 or CN2 is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J116 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the switching power supply connector J711 is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the drum motor is open-  
circuited.  
YES  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the drum mo-  
tor is open-circuited.  
6. Check for any open-circuited harness or any disconnected connector pin.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, counterclockwise as seen from its back, and if  
the motor load is abnormal, adjust the load on the drum shaft inside the EPU.  
Remove any foreign matter from the drive unit.  
(Do not try to rotate the motor clockwise as seen from its back.)  
8. Replace the LGC board.  
9. Replace the drum motor.  
Are the pins (K: 22 pin, C: 28 pin, M: 9 pin, Y: 3 pin) of the connector J116 on the LGC board  
always at the level "L", and the LEDs (K: D4, C: D3, M: D2, Y: D1) on the LGC board always lit?  
NO  
1. Check if the drum motor connector CN2 is disconnected.  
YES  
2. Check if the connector J116 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
6. Replace the drum motor.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the drum motor.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 19  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.10 Paper feeding system related service call  
C11 ADU paper side guide function abnormal  
Is the ADU unit mounted securely on the copier?  
NO  
Mount the ADU unit securely onto the copier.  
YES  
Is the timing belt for driving the paper side guide displaced?  
YES  
Put the belt on properly.  
NO  
Is the connector J103 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU unit.  
C12 ADU paper end guide function abnormal  
Is the ADU unit mounted securely on the copier?  
NO  
Mount the ADU unit securely onto the copier.  
YES  
Is the timing belt for driving the paper end guide displaced?  
YES  
Put the belt on properly.  
NO  
Is the connector J103 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU unit.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 20  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C13 1st cassette tray function abnormal  
C14 2nd cassette tray function abnormal  
C15 3rd cassette tray function abnormal  
C16 4th cassette tray function abnormal  
Is the cassette installed properly in the copier?  
NO  
Install the cassette properly into the copier.  
YES  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette tray-up limit sensor open-circuited?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette tray-up motor open-circuited?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the paper-size switch open-circuited?  
Is the cassette tray-up limit sensor connector, cassette tray-up motor connector, paper-size  
switch connector or connector J106 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the peg of the paper-size switch broken?  
YES  
1. Reconnect the connector.  
2. Replace any defective harnesses.  
3. Replace the paper-size switch.  
NO  
Is the gear of the cassette tray-up motor unit broken?  
YES  
Replace the gear.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette tray-up motor.  
2. Replace the cassette tray-up limit sensor.  
3. Replace the paper feed unit.  
4. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 21  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C18 LCF tray function abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit open-circuited?  
Is the relay connector of the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit or the connector  
J105 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Do the switches and sensors in the LCF unit function?  
YES  
1. Replace the LCF tray motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
NO  
1. Replace any faulty sensor or switch in the LCF unit.  
2. Replace the LCF drive PC board or the LCF tray-down switch PC board.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 22  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.11 Scanner related service call  
C27 Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a fixed time  
C28 Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a fixed time  
Remove the original glass, move the carriage to the paper feed side, turn ON the power  
switch, and then proceed to check the following items.  
C27 Is the carriage stuck at a point other than the home position?  
YES  
Check the SCM and SDV boards for any abnormal circuit.  
NO  
1. Check if any connector pin is disconnected, or any harness is open- or short-  
circuited.  
2. Check the scan motor drive pulley if its screws are loose.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the SDV board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any conductor pattern on the SCM board is open- or short-circuited.  
5. Replace the SDV board.  
6. Replace the SCM board.  
C28 Does the carriage, after arriving at its home position, make a big noise?  
NO  
YES  
Since the carriage home position sensor has not been turned ON,  
1. Check if the sensor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check the SDV and SCM boards for any abnormal circuit.  
Since the carriage has been stopped at its home position but does not move,  
1. Check if any connector pin is disconnected, or any harness is open- or short-  
circuited.  
2. Check if any conductor pattern on the SDV board is open- or short-circuited.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the SCM board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Replace the SDV board.  
5. Replace the SCM board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 23  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C29 Exposure lamp disconnection detected  
Does the exposure lamp light?  
1. Check the CCD and SCM boards for any disconnected connector.  
YES  
2. Check the shading correction plate of the original-width indicator unit if it is  
dusty.  
3. Check the CCD board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
4. Check the SCM board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
5. Replace the lens unit.  
NO  
6. Replace the SCM board.  
1. Check if the lamp connector is disconnected.  
2. Check if the thermostat is blown out.  
3. Check if the lamp has continuity.  
4. Check the SCM board if any pin of connectors J7-B1, -B2, -B4, -B5 and -B6 is disconnected  
or any harness is open- or short-circuited.  
5. Check the SCM board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
6. Replace the SCM board.  
7. Replace the lamp regulator.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 24  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.12 Copy process related service call  
C31 Used toner transport motor rotation abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the used toner transport motor open-circuited?  
Is the connector J122 or J102 on the LGC board, the relay connector or the used toner trans-  
port motor connector disconnected?  
YES  
Replace the harness. Reconnect the connectors.  
NO  
Is used toner jammed? Is any abnormal mechanical load found?  
YES  
1. Remove the jammed used toner.  
2. Check for any foreign matter in the drive system.  
3. Check the bearing of the used toner transport auger for any abnormality.  
4. Check if the toner bag is covered with used toner.  
NO  
1. Replace the used toner transport motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
* Since the used toner jamming can cause a serious damage to EPU, be sure to check that the  
EPU functions normally.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 25  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C33 Developer removal shutter function abnormal  
Reduce the mechanical load by adjusting the drive system. Remove any foreign matter.  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the developer removal shutter open/close motor  
open-circuited?  
Is any of the connectors J115 and J102 on the LGC board and the developer removal shutter  
open/close motor connector disconnected?  
YES  
Replace the harness. Reconnect the connector.  
NO  
1. Replace the developer removal shutter open/close motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
C35 Transfer belt unit contact/release function abnormal  
Reduce the mechanical load by adjusting the drive system. Remove any foreign matter.  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the transfer/transport unit drawer connector, or the  
harness inside the transfer/transport unit open-circuited?  
Is the transfer belt contact/release drive motor connector, LGC board connectors J115 or J102,  
transfer belt home position switch connector, or transfer belt limit switch connector discon-  
nected?  
Is the transfer belt home position switch or the transfer belt limit switch defectively installed?  
YES  
1. Replace the harness. Reconnect the connector.  
2. Reinstall the transfer belt home position switch or the transfer belt limit switch  
securely.  
NO  
1. Replace the transfer belt home position switch and the transfer belt limit switch.  
2. Replace the transfer belt contact/release drive motor.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 26  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C37 Transfer belt motor rotation abnormal  
*
Before performing the following checks, be sure to place the transfer belt unit in a lowered position;  
otherwise, the drums and the transfer belt would be damaged when you rotate the drum motor.  
Is the transfer belt motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector CN1 or CN2 of the transfer belt motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J116 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J711 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the transfer belt motor is  
open-circuited.  
YES  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the transfer  
belt motor is open-circuited.  
6. Check for any open-circuited harness or for any disconnected connector pin.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, clockwise as seen from its back, and if the motor  
load is abnormal, adjust the load on the transfer belt unit. Remove any for-  
eign matter from the drive unit.  
8. Replace the LGC board.  
9. Replace the transfer belt motor.  
Is the pin 15 of connector J116 on the LGC board always at the level "L", and is the D5 of LED  
on the LGC board lit?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector CN2 of the transfer belt motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J116 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check the LGC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
4. Check for any open-circuited harness and for any disconnected connector  
YES  
pin.  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
6. Replace the transfer belt motor.  
1. Check the LGC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the transfer belt motor.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 27  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C38 Auto toner initializing error (K)  
C39 Auto toner initializing error (C)  
C3A Auto toner initializing error (M)  
C3B Auto toner initializing error (Y)  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the EPU drawer connector open-circuited?  
Is any harness inside the EPU or the auto toner sensor harness open-circuited?  
Is the auto toner sensor connector or the connector J119 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the auto toner sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 28  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C3C Main charger wire abnormal (K)  
C3D Main charger wire abnormal (C)  
C3E Main charger wire abnormal (M)  
C3F Main charger wire abnormal (Y)  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the EPU drawer connector or any harness inside  
the EPU open-circuited?  
Is the wire cleaner drive motor connector, the connector J119 on the LGC board, the connector  
of the wire cleaner home position switch, or the connector of the wire cleaner limit switch dis-  
connected?  
Is the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch defectively installed?  
YES  
1. Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
2. Reinstall the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch  
NO  
securely.  
Is the main charger dislocated?  
Is the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch disconnected?  
YES  
1. Reinstall the main charger.  
2. Reconnect the wire cleaner home position switch.  
NO  
3. Reconnect the wire cleaner limit switch.  
Is the mechanical load too heavy?  
YES  
1. Check if the cleaning pad is in normal contact with the main charger wire.  
2. Eliminate any foreign matter present in the drive system.  
3. Check if any movable component is abnormally worn.  
NO  
4. Clean the wire cleaner drive auger and remove stains or foreign matters.  
5. Clean the slidable surface of the charger case and remove stains or foreign  
matters.  
1. Replace the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch.  
2. Replace the wire cleaner drive motor.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 29  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.13 Fuser unit related service call  
C41 Thermistor or heater abnormal when warming-up is started  
* To avoid any safety hazards, be sure to unplug the power cable before proceeding to check items  
in 1. and 2. below.  
* Be sure that the fuser unit is set in place securely.  
1. Checking the thermistors  
(1) Is any thermistor connector disconnected?  
(2) Are the thermistors (upper and lower, center and rear) in proper contact with the upper and lower  
fuser rollers?  
(3) Is the harness for the thermistors (upper and lower, center and rear) open-circuited?  
2. Checking the fuser lamps and SSR  
(1) Check if the upper or lower fuser lamp is open-circuited.  
(2) Check if the upper or lower fuser lamp connector is disconnected.  
(3) Check if the thermostat is blown out.  
(4) Check if the upper fuser roller or lower fuser roller SSR connector is disconnected.  
(5) Check if the AC harness is open-circuited.  
(6) Check if SSR or the switching power supply is broken.  
3. Checking the LGC board  
(1) Check the LGC board if the connector J122 is disconnected.  
(2) Check the LGC board for any abnormal condition, such as an open- or short-circuited conductor  
pattern.  
(3) Replace the LGC board.  
4. Clearing the status counter  
After completing the repair of what caused the problem C41 , proceed to do the following:  
(1) While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
(2) Enter [700] with digital keys, then press the START key.  
(3) Rewrite [1] or [2] displayed on the status counter to [0], then press the INTERRUPT key ( C41  
cleared).  
(4) Turn OFF the power and then back it ON again, and make sure that the copier gets ready normally.  
C42 Thermistor abnormal after the copier becomes ready  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board.  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, using the same procedure as in 1, 2 and 3  
of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [6] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0] using the same procedure as in 4 of C41 .  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 30  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C43 Thermistor abnormal during warming-up after abnormality judgment  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, following the same procedure as in 1, 2 and  
3 of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [4] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0], following the same procedure as in 4 of  
C41 .  
C44 Heater abnormal during warming-up after abnormality judgment  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, following the same procedure as in 1, 2 and  
3 of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [5] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0], following the same procedure as in 4 of  
C41 .  
C46 Heater abnormal (low temperature) after the copier has become ready  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, following the same procedure as in 1, 2 and  
3 of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [7] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0], following the same procedure as in 4 of  
C41 .  
C47 Rear thermistor abnormal after the copier has become ready  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, following the same procedure as in 1, 2 and  
3 of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [8] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0], following the same procedure as in 4 of  
C41 .  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 31  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C48 Heater abnormal (high temperature)  
1. Checking the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board  
Check the thermistors, fuser lamps, SSR and LGC board, following the same procedure as in 1, 2 and  
3 of C41 .  
2. Clearing the status counter  
Since [9] is shown on the status counter, rewrite it to [0], following the same procedure as in 4 of C41 .  
C7 Error C7  
* To avoid any safety hazards, be sure to unplug the power cord before proceeding to check the  
items in 1. and 2. below.  
* Be sure that the fuser unit is set in place securely.  
1. Check if any thermistor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check if any harness for the thermistors (center and rear, upper and lower) is open-circuited.  
3. Check the LGC board if the connector J122 is disconnected.  
4. After completing the repair of what caused the C7 problem, proceed to rewrite the status counter  
to [0], following the same procedure as for C41 .  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 32  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.14 Communications related service call  
C57 Communications error between Main-CPU and Sorter-CPU  
1. Check if a sorter other than specified is attached.  
2. Check the LGC board if any conductor pattern around IC88, IC89, IC96 or J123 is open- or short-  
circuited.  
3. Check the IPC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
4. Check the harness connected to the connector J2 on the IPC board for any disconnected pin or  
any open-circuit.  
5. Check if the switching power supply fuse F9 is blown out.  
6. Check the controller PC board inside the sorter for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
7. Check the connection between the sorter and the copier for any disconnected connector pin or for  
any open-circuited harness.  
8. Replace the IPC board.  
9. Replace the LGC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 33  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C5A Communications error between Main-CPU and printer controller  
<<For a built-in type printer controller>>  
1. Check if the printer controller unit is securely mounted on the copier.  
2. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the connector  
J113 on the LGC board and the connector J168 on the IMC board are disconnected.  
3. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the printer controller is open-circuited.  
4. Check if the connector J710 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
5. Check the IMC and LGC boards for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
6. Replace the LGC board.  
7. Replace the IMC board.  
<<For an external type printer controller>>  
1. Check if the printer controller power is turned ON.  
2. Check if the harness between the PIF board and the printer controller is open-circuited.  
3. Check if the PIF board is firmly connected to the IMC board.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the connector  
J113 on the LGC board and the connector J168 on the IMC board are disconnected.  
5. Check the PIF, IMC and LGC boards for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
6. Replace the PIF board.  
7. Replace the LGC board.  
8. Replace the IMC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 34  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C5B Main-CPU signal transmission error to IMC-CPU  
C5C Main-CPU signal reception error from IMC-CPU  
1. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the connector  
J113 on the LGC board and the connector J168 on the IMC board are disconnected.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 35  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.15 ADF related service call  
C72 Error of aligning sensor automatic adjustment  
1. Check if any foreign matter is present between the aligning sensor and the reflecting mirror, and if  
the reflecting mirror is stained.  
2. Check if the harness between the aligning sensor and PWA-F-LGC-770 is open-circuited.  
3. Check PWA-F-LGC-770 for any open- or short-circuit around IC1, IC14 and CN14.  
4. Replace the aligning sensor.  
5. Replace PWA-F-LGC-770.  
6. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
C73 EEPROM initializing error  
1. Check PWA-F-LGC-770 if any open- or short circuit is present around IC7.  
2. Replace PWA-F-LGC-770.  
3. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
C74 Error of exit sensor automatic adjustment  
1. Check if any foreign matter is present between the exit sensor and the reflecting mirror, and if the  
reflecting mirror is stained.  
2. Check if the harness between the exit sensor and PWA-F-LGC-770 is open-circuited.  
3. Check PWA-F-LGC-770 for any open- or short-circuit around IC1, IC14 and CN14.  
4. Replace the exit sensor.  
5. Replace PWA-F-LGC-770.  
6. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 36  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.16 Other service calls  
C94 Main-CPU abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
YES  
Observe the condition for a while.  
1. Check if the conductor pattern between Main CPU (IC84) and MROM (IC56) is open- or  
short-circuited.  
2. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the LGC board.  
C9A Main memory abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
Observe the condition for a while.  
YES  
1. Check if the conductor pattern between the main CPU (IC84), MROM (IC56), SRAM (IC41,  
IC42) and BC-RAM (IC55) is open- or short-circuited.  
2. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the LGC board.  
C9E IMC board connection abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
Observe the condition for a while.  
YES  
1. Check if the IMC board and the SIC board are firmly connected to the MTH board.  
2. Check the IMC board if the connectors J168, J162, J169, J165, J166 or J161 is disconnected.  
3. Check the SIC board if the connector J182 is disconnected.  
4. Check the SCM board if the connector J1 is disconnected.  
5. Check if the harness connected to the IMC board is open- or short-circuited or if any con-  
nector pin is disconnected.  
6. Check if the harness between the SCM and SIC boards is open-circuited or if any connector  
pin is disconnected.  
7. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the IMC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 37  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.17 Laser optical unit related service call  
CA1 Polygonal motor rotation abnormal  
Is the polygonal motor rotating?  
NO  
YES  
1. Check if the polygonal motor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check the IMC board if connectors J166 or J161 are disconnected.  
3. Check for any open-circuited harness or disconnected connector pin.  
4. Check the IMC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
5. Replace the IMC board.  
6. Replace the laser optical unit.  
Are both A2 and A3 pins of the connector J166 on the IMC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check the IMC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
2. Replace the IMC board.  
3. Replace the laser optical unit.  
YES  
1. Check the IMC board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
2. Replace the IMC board.  
3. Replace the laser optical unit.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 38  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CA2 H-SYNC abnormal  
Is the polygonal motor rotating?  
NO  
Refer to CA1 , "Polygonal motor rotation abnormal".  
YES  
Are both A2 and A3 pins of the connector J166 on the IMC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
Refer to CA1 , "Polygonal motor rotation abnormal".  
YES  
Is the harness between the RLY and IMC boards open-circuited?  
Are the connector J166 on the IMC board or the connector J180 on the RLY board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Replace the harness. Reconnect the connectors.  
NO  
1. Replace the IMC board.  
2. Replace the laser optical unit.  
CD1 Laser calibration error (K)  
CD2 Laser calibration error (C)  
CD3 Laser calibration error (M)  
CD4 Laser calibration error (Y)  
1. Check if the harness between the IMC and RLY boards is open-circuited.  
2. Check if the connector J162 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J178 on the RLY board is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the RLY board and the switching power supply is open-circuited.  
5. Check if the connector J179 on the RLY board is disconnected.  
6. Check if the connector J161 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
7. Check the switching power supply if the connector J705 or J707 is disconnected.  
8. Check the RLY board if the harness of the connector J174 (Y), J175 (M), J176 (C) or J177 (K) is  
open-circuited.  
9. Replace the IMC board.  
10. Replace the laser optical unit.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 39  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.18 Sorter related service call  
CC1 Transport motor rotation abnormal  
After setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the sorter controller board, as shown  
on the right, when you press the push switch SW2 or SW3, will the transport  
motor (M1) start rotating? (To stop the motor, press the switch again.)  
1
2
3
4
NO  
Disconnect J6 on the sorter controller board. Does the resistance between J6-1  
YES  
and J6-2 on the harness side measure approx. 5?  
NO  
Check the wiring up to the transport motor.If it is normal, replace  
YES  
the transport motor.  
When manual stapling is done or when the push switch SW2 or SW3 on the  
sorter controller board is pressed, does the voltage between J6-1 (+) and J6-2  
(–) on the controller board measure approx. 24V?  
NO  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
YES  
Reinstall the sorter firmly.  
When the transport motor is rotated manually, does the voltage between J5-4 (+) and J5-5 (–)  
change to 0V or 5V alternately?  
NO  
Replace the transport motor clock sensor (PI6).  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 40  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CC3 Bin-shift motor rotation abnormal  
When the push switch SW2 or SW3 on the sorter controller board is pressed, does the bin unit  
move upward (or downward)?  
YES  
Replace the lead-cam home position sensor (PI2).  
NO  
While the above procedure is proceeding, does the bin-shift motor rotate?  
NO  
Check if the lead-cam drive belt is properly fitted on the sprocket.  
YES  
Disconnect J15 on the sorter controller board. Does the resistance between J15-5 and J15-6  
on the harness side measure approx. 3?  
NO  
Check the wiring up to the bin-shift motor (M2). If it is normal, replace the bin-  
shift motor (M2).  
YES  
Connect J15 on the sorter controller board. Having tester probes touch J15-5 (+) and J15-6  
(–), press SW2; does the tester's pointer swing?  
NO  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
YES  
Replace the bin-shift motor (M2).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 41  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CC4 Guide bar swing motor rotation abnormal  
At the time the guide bar swings, does pulse output occur on J13-3 to J13-6 on the sorter  
controller board? In addition, does the voltage between J13-1 and J13-2 show 24V?  
YES  
Check the wiring up to the guide bar swing motor (M3). If it is normal, replace the  
guide bar swing motor.  
NO  
Is a voltage of 24V being supplied from the copier?  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
NO  
Check the 24V-power supply of the copier.  
CC5 Stapler-unit swing motor rotation abnormal  
At the time the stapler unit swings, does the voltage between J9-1 (+) and J9-2 (–) on the sorter  
controller board show 24V?  
NO  
Is a voltage of 24V being supplied from the copier?  
NO  
Check the 24V-power supply of the copier.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
YES  
Is stapler-unit swing switch (MS9) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the stapler-unit swing switch (MS9).  
YES  
Does the resistance between J9-1 and J9-2 on the harness side measure approx. 25?  
NO  
Replace the stapler-unit swing motor (M5).  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 42  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CCA Automatic adjustment error of bin inside paper sensor  
After having retried automatic adjustment of the bin inside paper sensor, is there any abnormal-  
ity found?  
NO  
Complete.  
YES  
Is the connector J12 on the sorter controller board connected normally?  
NO  
Insert the connector J12 properly.  
YES  
After having tried automatic adjustment of the bin inside paper  
sensor, is there any abnormality found?  
NO  
Complete.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controler board.  
After having tried automatic adjustment of the bin inside paper sensor, is there  
any abnormality found?  
NO  
Complete.  
YES  
Check if the bin inside paper sensor is installed securely.  
After having tried automatic adjustment of the bin inside paper sensor, is there  
any abnormality found?  
NO  
Complete.  
YES  
Replace the bin inside paper sensor.  
After having tried automatic adjustment of the bin inside paper sensor, is there  
any abnormality found?  
YES  
NO  
Complete.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 43  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CCC No power being supplied  
Are the signal cords J1 and J20 connected correctly?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Does the circuit breaker (CB2) on the sorter controller board function normally?  
YES  
Press the circuit breaker.  
NO  
Is the fuse blown out?  
YES  
Replace the fuse.  
NO  
Using the 50V (DC) tester range, measure the voltage between J1-1 (+) and J1-2 (–) on the  
sorter controller board; does it show approx. 24V?  
NO  
Check the copier’s 24V-power supply.  
YES  
Using the 50V (DC) tester range, measure the voltage between J1-3 (+) and J1-4 (–) on the  
sorter controller board; does it show approx. 24V?  
NO  
Check the copier’s 24V-power supply.  
YES  
Replace the sorter controller board; is the power supplied normally?  
NO  
Replace the copier’s DC controller board.  
YES  
Complete.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 44  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.19 Image quality related service call  
(1) After checking CE1 , CE2 and CE4 , and taking appropriate action, perform the following steps.  
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [878] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
3. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the copier will become ready normally.  
(2) After confirming the items in (1), perform the following steps.  
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [415] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from [1], [2] or [3] to [0], and then press the [INTER-  
RUPT] key.  
4. Enter [416] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from [1], [2] or [3] to [0], and then press the [INTER-  
RUPT] key.  
6. Enter [417] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from [1], [2] or [3] to [0], and then press the [INTER-  
RUPT] key.  
8. Enter [418] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from [1], [2] or [3] to [0], and then press the [INTER-  
RUPT] key.  
10. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the copier will become ready normally.  
CE1 Image quality sensor abnormal (OFF level)  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector J113, J114, J115 or J118 on the  
LGC board, or the connector J168 on the IMC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between  
the LGC board and the IMC board, or the harness between the LGC board and the switching  
power supply open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is LED (D21) on the LGC lit? Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
YES  
Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.  
NO  
1. Replace the image quality sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 45  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CE2 Image quality sensor (no pattern level)  
1. Check that the transfer belt unit is fully raised.  
2. Check that the transfer belt unit is fully mounted inward.  
3. Check for any abnormal stain, large scar or fray on the transfer belt surface.  
4. Check that the drum and transfer belt are rotating. If abnormal, repair any mechanical prob-  
lem.  
Is any of the connectors J113, J114, J115,J118 or J122 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the connector J168 on the IMC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the IMC board open-circuited?  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or stained?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open-circuited?  
Is the main high-voltage transformer connector disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the main high-voltage transformer open-circuited?  
Is the transfer transformer connector disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the transfer transformer open-circuited?  
Is any of the high-voltage contact points of the transfer belt unit in faulty contact? Is any contact  
points stained?  
Is the harness of the main high-voltage transformer or the transfer transformer disconnected or  
open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness. Do necessary cleaning.  
Repair the high-voltage contact point.  
NO  
Is LED (D21) on the LGC board lit? Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
YES  
Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.  
NO  
1. Replace the image quality sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 46  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CE4 Image quality control test pattern abnormal  
(1) Check 08-415 to 418 [Abnormal detection counter Y to K (display/0 clearing)] and check  
which color is in error (the value of the color in error is other than 0).  
(2) Check 05-819 [Output value indication of image quality sensor/Low density pattern] and  
check whether the value of the color in error (the color checked in (1)) is under 300.  
Under 300  
Transfer belt cleaning defective  
300 or  
above  
Check transfer belt and if a cleaning defect is found,  
check around the transfer belt cleaning blade to correct it.  
Go to (7).  
(3) Set 08-401 [Image quality control 2] to [0](disabled).  
(4) Specify the color in error (the color checked in (1)) on 04-231 [Gradation check pattern] and  
check the output image if there is any error (image lacking, white paper, solid over the whole  
page, etc.).  
Image error(s)  
exists  
Correct the items related to the image. If OK, go to (6)  
No image  
errors  
(5) Sensor fault: Replace image quality sensor.  
(6) Change 08-401 [Image quality control 2] back to [1](enabled) if it is [0].  
(7) Perform 05-878 [Forced performing of image quality control] to check that it completes  
normally (that it does not generate the error [CE4]).  
(8) Clear all of 08-415 to 418 [Abnormal detection counter Y to K (display/0 clearing)].  
(9) Perform 05-879 [Automatic initialization of image quality control] (only when replacing  
specified parts; see Chapter 1.5).  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 47  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CE5 Temperature/humidity sensor upper-limit abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ?  
Is the LGC board connector J112 or the temperature/humidity sensor connector disconnected ?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
CF1 Color registration control abnormal  
<Check of the status of color registration sensor error>  
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
2. Input [461] with digital keys and press [START].  
3. The four values of the color registration control result are displayed (Y(0), M(1), C(2), K(3)).  
4. Check the value for Y(0) displayed in 3.  
When [CF1] is generated, a value from 1 to 15 is displayed (normal if 0 or 16 or above).  
1-14: Data error (color registration sensor is normal)  
15: Reading error of color registration test pattern  
<Disabling the color registration control>  
5. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
6. Input [742] with digital keys and press [START].  
7. Set the color registration control setting to [1](manual).  
8. Input [743] with digital keys and press [START].  
9. Set the color registration control for warming-up to [0](disabled).  
10.Turn the power OFF.  
<Check by color registration control forced performing>  
11.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
12.Input [407] with digital keys and press [START]. This will result in forced performing of color  
registration control.  
* At this time, use a digital tester to monitor the test point TP91 (front color registration  
sensor output) and TP93 (rear color registration sensor output) on the LGC board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 48  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– If they are normal –  
Before starting the color registration control forced performing, a voltage of approxi-  
mately 0.7V DC is displayed.  
After starting it, the voltage changes to approximately 4.4V DC, and this may drop  
instantaneously down to 0.7V DC. (There may be no fluctuations in voltage, depending  
on the reaction speed of the digital tester.)  
When the color registration control forced performing ends, it returns to a voltage of  
approximately 0.7V DC.  
Voltage before color registration control forced performing  
DC 0.7V  
DC 0V  
Normal  
Check if there is any disconnection or short-circuit of harness  
between LGC board and color registration sensor, or harness  
between LGC board and IMC board. Inspect connector section  
(J168 on IMC board, J113 and J114 on LGC board, connector  
on color registration sensor).  
If there is no abnormality, check color registration sensor.  
Check if there is any disconnection or short-circuit of harness  
between LGC board and color registration sensor. Inspect con-  
nector section (J113 and J114 on LGC board, connector on color  
registration sensor).  
DC 5V  
DC 4.4V  
Check if there is any disconnection or short-circuit of harness  
between LGC board and color registration sensor or harness  
between LGC board and IMC board. Inspect connector section  
(J168 on IMC board, J113 and J114 on LGC board, connector  
on color registration sensor)  
If there is no abnormality, check color registration sensor.  
Voltage during color registration control forced performing  
Normally DC 4.4V.  
Instantaneously  
may drop down to  
0.7V DC  
Normally DC 0.7V  
Check if there is any charge defects or exposure errors onto the  
photoconductive drum (errors in the laser optical unit). Follow the  
next check item 13. and after.  
Normally DC 4.4V  
Reading defect of color registration test pattern. Follow the next  
check item 13. and after.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 49  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Check by grid pattern>  
13.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
14.Input [1] with digital key and press [SETTINGS].  
15.Check that there is no image density difference among the front/center/rear areas of the  
output grid pattern for each of yellow, magenta, cyan and black. Check that there is no  
abnormality in the overall image.  
* At this point, there is no problem if theY, M, C and K grid patterns are out of alignment.  
– If there is difference in tonal balance between front and rear area –  
• Check the state of contact of the photoconductive drum and the transfer belt.  
• Check the quantity of developer (check whether developer material is properly sup-  
plied onto the surface of the developer sleeve).  
– If there is any yellow, magenta, cyan or black streak in the secondary scanning direc-  
tion –  
• Check if there is any stain or dust on the main charger wire that corresponds to the  
color of the streak.  
– If there is any white streak in the secondary scanning direction –  
• Check if there is any stain or dust on the slit glass of the laser optical unit.  
– If the entire page is solid in a specific color –  
• Defect in main high-voltage transformer corresponding to that color or defect in the  
laser optical unit.  
Of the four main high-voltage transformers, replace the main high-voltage trans-  
former considered to be defective with other main high-voltage transformer consid-  
ered to be normal, and then output the chart again.  
If the solid color over the entire page changes as the result of replacing the main  
high-voltage transformer, that main high-voltage transformer replaced is defective.  
If the solid color over the entire page does not change, check whether there is any  
disconnection of the harness between the LGC board and the main high-voltage  
transformer or any defects in the power supply to the main charger (disconnection  
of high-voltage harness or contact defects). if there is no problem, check the laser  
optical unit.  
If the density is low on both front and rear sides and any of the above abnormalities are not  
found, make the following check.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 50  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Check by the gradation pattern>  
16.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
17.Input [4] with digital key and press [SETTINGS].  
18.Check the output gradation images for gamma adjustment if there is any abnormality in  
yellow, magenta, cyan and black.  
– If there are any abnormalities –  
1 Check if the drum and transfer belt are rotating. If not, correct any mechanical prob-  
lems.  
2 Check if the transfer belt unit is set fully upward.  
3 Check if the transfer belt unit is set fully inside.  
4 Check the surface of the transfer belt for any abnormal stain, large scar or tear.  
5 Check if the connector of the transfer transformer is disconnected.  
6 Check if the high-voltage harness of the main high-voltage transformer/transfer is  
disconnected.  
7 Check the harness between the LGC board and the transfer transformer if it is open-  
circuited.  
8 Check the high-voltage contact of the transfer belt unit if it is contacting properly or if  
it is not dirty.  
9 Check if the high-voltage harness is disconnected.  
0 Check if the connector J113, J114 or J118 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
Check if the connector J166 or J168 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
!™ Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color registration sensor is  
open-circuited.  
Check if the color registration sensor connector is disconnected.  
Check if the main high-voltage transformer connector is disconnected.  
!∞ Check if the harness between the LGC board and the main high-voltage transformer  
is open-circuited.  
Replace the transfer transformer.  
Replace the main high-voltage transformer.  
19. Check the sensor detection area of the transfer belt for any damage, and if damaged,  
replace the transfer belt.  
20. Check the light receiving area of the color registration sensor if it is not dirty.  
* Be sure to do the following after having made checks and corrections:  
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [742] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
3. Set the color registration control setting to [0] (automatic).  
4. Enter [743] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
5. Set the color registration control for warming-up setting to [1] (enabled).  
6. Turn OFF the power.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 51  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.20 Options related service call  
F07 Communications error between System-CPU and Main-CPU  
1. Check if the SIC board is firmly connected to the MTH board.  
2. Check if the IMC board is firmly connected to the MTH board.  
3. Check if the IMC board connector J168 is disconnected.  
4. Check if the LGC board connector J113 is disconnected.  
5. Check if the harness between the IMC and LGC boards is open-circuited.  
6. Check the version of FROM on the SIC board.  
7. Check the version of MROM on the LGC board.  
8. Check the version of IMC-ROM on the IMC board.  
9. Replace the SIC board.  
10. Replace the IMC board.  
11. Replace the LGC board.  
F11 Communications error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU  
1. Check if the SIC board connector J182 is disconnected.  
2. Check if the SCM board connector J1 is disconnected.  
3. Check if the harness between the SIC and SCM boards is open-circuited.  
4. Check the version of FROM on the SIC board.  
5. Check the version of SROM on the SCM board.  
6. Replace the SIC board.  
7. Replace the SCM board.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 52  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.21 Image processing options related service call  
F51 Communications error between System-CPU and AI board during pre-scanning  
1. Check if the AI board is securely connected to the connector on the SIC board.  
2. Check if FROM is mounted on the IC8 on the AI board.  
3. Check if FROM is mounted in the proper direction on the AI board.  
4. Replace the AI board.  
5. Replace the SIC board.  
* Service call F51 occurs only when copying with the copy mode “AI” selected.The other copy modes  
are operable.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 53  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Troubleshooting of Image  
(1) Color deviation  
<Symptoms>  
A B C  
A B C  
Condition  
All modes  
Location  
Phenomena  
Color  
White void areas, color blur  
deviation  
White void  
Text mode  
Black text outlines in color  
background  
A B C  
A B C  
Text/Photo mode  
Photo mode  
Map mode  
Color blur in outline of line  
or text  
Color  
deviation  
A B C  
A B C  
Cause  
Defect area  
Step  
Check Item  
Main-Classification Sub-Classification Specific-Classification  
1
2
Output build-in grid pattern on A3/LD.  
Check grid pattern.  
Color registration  
Control  
Control error or  
poor optimization  
Abnormal paper  
transport speed  
3
Paper transport  
speed in  
Low speed  
Adjustment defect  
Check grid pattern.  
registration section Low speed  
Registration roller  
aging change  
Low speed  
Registration roller  
life worn out  
Check condition of registration rubber roller  
surface.  
High speed  
Adjustment defect  
Adjustment defect  
Check grid pattern  
4
Paper transport  
High speed  
Check grid pattern.  
speed in fuser unit  
Feed the paper with the front door open and  
check the paper transport between transfer  
belt and fuser unit.  
No defect in normal paper mode, but in thick  
paper 3 mode, deviation occurs in order (Y)  
MCK, at trailing edge of A3/LD sheet.  
Run operation check in test mode.  
Run operation check in test mode.  
Drum drive system  
5
Drum rotation  
Unstable  
Motor abnormal  
Control circuit  
abnormal  
Drum motor  
Inadequate  
Adjustment defect  
Re-check values set for drum motor rotation  
speed.  
rotation speed  
Drum coupling  
Loose coupling  
Damage  
Check grid pattern.  
Deformation  
Deformation or  
damage  
Transfer belt system  
6
7
Transfer belt  
Drive roller  
Check grid pattern.  
Check condition of transfer belt edge  
Check grid pattern.  
Slipping  
Stain  
Check condition of roller surface.  
Check grid pattern.  
Large driving load Used toner  
Cleaning blade  
Over capacity  
Peeling  
Laser optical unit  
Tilt adjustment  
mechanism  
Reflection mirror  
warp  
Adjustment mech-  
anism defect  
Check grid pattern.  
Check grid pattern.  
Check grid pattern.  
fθ lens characteris-  
tic defect  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 54  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Criteria  
Measures  
Perform following procedures from 2 and after.  
Grid line deviation?  
Color registraion control forced performing.  
Parallel deviation in secondary-scanning, occurring all over the Re-adjust paper feed motor speed. * See P. 4-58.  
face, almost in order Y-M-C-K from paper exit side?  
Re-adjust paper feed motor speed. * See P. 4-58.  
Does the roller surface lack in friction and is it slippery?  
Replace registration roller.  
Parallel deviation in secondary-scanning, occurring all over the By fine adjustment (a few steps at a time), slacken paper  
face, almost in order Y-M-C-K from paper exit side?  
Is paper tightened?  
slightly, not tighten it (to a straight line in side view) between  
transfer belt and fuser unit.  
Is paper tightened?  
Increase the value of 05-408 (correction of fuser motor  
rotation speed in the thick paper 3 mode), by finely adjusting  
a few steps at a time.  
Troubleshoot drum driving.  
Troubleshoot drum driving.  
Is the value significantly different from the default value 1700?  
(The value shifts one step each in connection with transfer belt  
speed.)  
Reset drum motor speed to 1700.  
Tighten screws.  
Replace couplings.  
Replace couplings.  
Fluctuating primary-scanning deviation?  
Damaged or broken edge?  
Replace belt (troubleshoot transfer belt).  
Fluctuating secondary-scanning deviation?  
Is there any stain?  
Clean it.  
Fluctuating secondary-scanning deviation?  
Troubleshoot used toner system.  
Replace cleaning blade(troubleshoot transfer belt).  
Replace unit.  
Deviation at front or rear of primary-scanning line?  
Primary-scanning line warp?  
Replace unit. (Reflection mirror)  
Replace unit.  
Primary-scanning line warp?  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 55  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Uneven pitch and blur  
<Symptoms>  
Feeding  
direction  
Condition  
Location  
Phenomenon  
Uneven pitch  
All modes  
Occurs cyclically at right  
angles to paper feeding  
direction  
Cause  
Main-Classification Sub-Classification Specific-Classification  
Defect area  
Step  
Check item  
1
2
Output built-in halftone pattern on A3/LD.  
Check grid pattern.  
Abnormal paper  
transport speed  
Paper transport  
speed in  
Low speed  
Low speed  
Low speed  
Adjustment defect  
registration  
section  
Registration roller  
aging change  
Registration roller  
life worn out  
Check condition of registration rubber roller  
surface.  
High speed  
High speed  
Adjustment defect  
Adjustment defect  
Check grid pattern.  
3
Paper transport  
Check pattern.  
speed in fuser unit  
Feed the paper with the front door open and  
check the paper transport between transfer  
belt and fuser unit.  
Drum drive system  
4
5
Drum  
Surface condition  
Check pattern.  
Damage  
Check drum surface.  
Attached foreign  
matter  
Check drum surface.  
Drum rotation  
Unstable  
Motor abnormal  
Control circuit  
abnormal  
Run operation check in test mode.  
Run operation check in test mode.  
Drum motor  
Inadequate  
Adjustment defect  
Re-check values set for drum motor rotaion  
speed.  
rotation speed  
Drum coupling  
Loose coupling  
Damaged  
Check pattern.  
Deformation  
Timing belt  
Deformation or  
damage  
Transfer belt system  
6
7
Drive unit  
Tension looseness  
Stain  
Check pattern.  
Transfer belt  
Check pattern.  
Condition of transfer belt edge.  
Check pattern.  
Drive roller  
Slipping  
Check condition of roller surface.  
Check pattern.  
Large driving load Used toner  
Cleaning blade  
Surface inclined  
Over capacity  
Peeling  
Laser optical unit  
8
Polygonal mirror  
Deformation  
Check pattern.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 56  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Criteria  
Measures  
Perform following procedures from 2 and after.  
Uneven pitch extending 2.5mm to 3mm within an area about  
130mm wide from leading edge of the image?  
Re-adjust paper feed motor rotation speed. * See P. 4-58.  
Re-adjust paper feed motor rotation speed. * See P. 4-58.  
Replace registration roller.  
Does the roller surface lack in friction and is it slippery?  
Uneven pitch extending approx. 2.9mm within an area about  
150mm wide from trailing edge of the image?  
Is paper tightened?  
By fine adjustment (a few steps at a time), slacken paper slightly,  
not tighten it (to a straight line in side view) between transfer belt  
and fuser unit.  
Uneven pitch approx. 94mm overall?  
Is there damage?  
Replace drum.  
Is there any attached foreign matter?  
Clean or replace drum.  
Troubleshoot drum driving.  
Troubleshoot drum driving.  
Is the value significantly different from the default value 1700? Reset drum motor rotation speed to 1700.  
(The value shifts one step each in connection with transfer belt  
speed)  
Re-fasten screws.  
Replace couplings.  
Replace couplings.  
Uneven pitch approx. 2.5 mm overall?  
Uneven pitch approx. 75 mm overall?  
Damaged or broken edge?  
Re-fasten screws to fix tension arm.  
Replace transfer belt (troubleshoot transfer belt).  
Clean it.  
Uneven pitch approx. 75 mm overall?  
Is there any stain?  
Uneven pitch approx. 75 mm overall?  
Troubleshoot used toner system.  
Replace cleaning blade (troubleshoot transfer belt).  
Replace unit.  
Uneven pitch approx. 0.3 mm overall?  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 57  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* Fine adjustment of registration roller paper transport speed  
The optimized value is not always obtained for jitter and color deviation because fine error is gener-  
ated in automatic adjustment.  
If uneven color is generated in the secondary-scanning direction of the image and the further adjust-  
ment is necessary, perform the following procedure from 1 to 7.  
1. Start up with the test print mode [04].  
2. Select the A3/LD cassette.  
3. Input the code [234] (output the half tone pattern).  
4. Select [M] on the control panel and press [START] key. Since the halftone image is to be continuously  
printed out, press [STOP] key when the first paper starts being fed, to make only one print.  
5. According to the steps 3 and 4, print out the halftone image of cyan (C) and black (K).  
6. Criteria for judging paper transport speed by image  
Uneven color of 2.5mm pitch in halftone image is generated.  
Paper transport speed is low.  
Uneven color is partially generated at 120mm with magenta, 195mm with cyan and 270mm with black  
from the trailing edge.  
Paper transport speed is high.  
7. Adjust "Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed" of code 05-404 by two steps, assuming the  
speed status from the grid pattern image and from the above image criteria 6. After adjusting, repeat  
the procedure from 1 to 6. When the step value decreases, the paper transport speed becomes  
higher.  
When the step value increases, the paper transport speed becomes lower. The speed should not be  
too low or too high because either case has harmful effect. (The step value should be approx. within  
4289±30.)  
Note: First perform the adjustments 05-401 to 403, before proceeding to 05-404, "Fine adjustment of feed motor  
rotation speed".  
If the adjustment 05-406 is performed, the value of 05-404 is changed. Therefore, perform the settings of 05-  
404 again.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 58  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Defect of image density, color reproduction and gray balance  
Check image density.  
Check gray balance.  
Check color reproduction.  
Cause/Defect area  
Density/Color reproduction  
/Gray balance  
Step  
1
Check items  
Check density/color reproduction/  
gray balance.  
Measures  
Perform automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction.  
Remarks  
Printer section (Note 1)  
2
3
4
5
Check printer image.  
Output test print image for each color See step 6 if  
(04-231).  
defect occurs.  
Parameter adjustment value  
(Note 2)  
Check image parameters.  
Adjust color balance.  
Adjust image density.  
Clean them.  
Scanner  
Is the original glass or mirrors  
or lens filter dirty?  
Printer density error  
(Note 1)  
Check density of printer image.  
Perform image quality control forced  
performing (05-878).  
Output test print image in each color  
(04-231).  
Printer image error  
(Note 2)  
6
Is there any faded image (low density)? Perform troubleshooting procedures  
against faded image.  
Is there any fog in the background?  
Perform troubleshooting procedures  
against background fogging.  
Perform troubleshooting procedure  
against blotch image.  
Is there any blotch image?  
Is there any transfer defect?  
Perform troubleshooting procedure  
against transfer defect.  
Is there any cleaning defect in the  
transfer belt?  
Modify transfer belt  
(refer to Service Manual).  
(Check inside the machine.)  
Note: 1) When adjusting printer section, perform "image quality control forced performing" and then "automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction".  
2) When adjusting parameters, perform "automatic adjustment of gamma correction".  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 59  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Background Fogging  
Cause/Defect area  
Density reproduction  
Step  
Check items  
Measures  
Perform automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction.  
Remarks  
Go to step 5  
If defects  
occur.  
1
Image density reproduction defect  
Printer  
2
3
4
Check printer image.  
Output test print image (04-231) for  
each color and check it.  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
Check image processing parameters. Check the value of offset amount of  
processing background.  
Adjust image processing  
parameters.  
While checking the above encircled  
image, remove background fog by  
adjusting offset amount of processing  
background.  
Scanner stain  
Auto-toner  
5
6
Is the original glass or mirrors  
or lens filter dirty?  
Clean them.  
Is the auto-toner sensor normal?  
Check operation of auto-toner sensor  
and re-adjust.  
7
8
9
Is the toner supply operating constantly?  
Is the main charger output normal?  
Is the developer bias proper?  
Inspect motor and circuits.  
Check circuits. (Note)  
Main charger output  
Developer bias  
Developer unit  
Check circuits. (Note)  
10 Is the contact between the drum  
and developer material right?  
11 Is the developer's life finished?  
12 Is it cleaned properly?  
Adjust doctor-to-sleeve gap and pole  
position.  
Developer material  
Drum cleaning blade  
Toner dusting  
Replace developer material.  
Inspect drum cleaning blade pressure.  
Remove toner and clean.  
13 Is toner accumulated on the seals of  
the developer unit?  
Note:  
If the main charger and developer bias outputs seem to be abnormal, replace the main high-voltage transformer of the color likely  
to be abnormal with another transformer of another color likely to be normal, and then, output the chart again.  
If the same color remains abnormal, check if there is any disconnection of harness between the LGC board and the main high-  
voltage transformer, disconnection of high-voltage harness, the power supply defect, or stain on the main charger wire.  
If the color changes as the result of replacing the main high-voltage transformer, this fogging trouble is caused by the main high-  
voltage transformer defect. Therefore, replace the main high-voltage transformer of the abnormal color with new one.  
After this checking, return the other main high-voltage transformer back to the original color position.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 60  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Moire/lack of sharpness  
B
A
Moire  
Cause/Defect area  
Density reproduction  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Image density reproduction  
defect  
Perform automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction.  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
2
3
Check image processing  
parameters.  
Check sharpness adjustment value.  
Printer section  
Check printer image.  
Output test print image (04-231)  
for each color and check.  
When defects occur,  
perform the corre-  
sponding trouble-  
shooting procedures.  
4
Adjust image processing  
parameters.  
While checking the above encircled  
images A and B, control moire by  
sharpness adjustment.  
Lack of sharpness  
Cause/Defect area  
Density reproduction  
Step  
1
Check items  
Image density reproduction  
defect  
Measures  
Remarks  
Perform automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction.  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
2
3
Check image processing  
parameters.  
Check sharpness adjustment value.  
Printer section  
Check printer image.  
Output test print image (04-231)  
for each color and check.  
When defects occur,  
perform the corre-  
sponding trouble-  
shooting procedures.  
4
Adjust image processing  
parameters.  
While checking the above encircled  
image A, modify sharpness by  
sharpness adjustment.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 61  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Toner offset  
Black solid  
Approx.  
195mm  
Shadow image  
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 195 mm behind the high density image.)  
Cause/Defect area  
Density  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is density too high?  
Measures  
Perform automatic adjustment of  
gamma correction.  
Remarks  
Fuser unit  
2
Is fuser roller pressure proper?  
Check pressure removal parts and  
pressure mechanism.  
3
4
Is thermostat contact good?  
Is there scratch on the fuser roller  
surface?  
Establish contact.  
Replace fuser roller.  
5
6
7
8
9
Did fuser roller life end?  
Replace fuser roller.  
Is fuser roller temperature proper?  
Check paper thickness and its mode.  
Is non-recommended paper used?  
Is specified developer used?  
Check control circuit.  
Paper  
Select proper mode.  
Advise to use recommended paper.  
Use specified developer and toner.  
Clean them.  
Developer material  
Scanner  
10 Are mirrors or original glass  
or lens filter dirty?  
Printer section  
11 Check printer image.  
Check test print image (04-231).  
See next steps  
12 and 13 if  
defect occurs.  
Repeat a few  
times if  
Printer density error *  
Image quality control  
12 Is printer density too high?  
13 Is the control activated?  
Perform image quality control forced  
perfoming (05-878).  
Check test print image (04-231).  
Check image quality control related codes.  
necessary.  
* When adjusting printer section, perform "image quality control forced performing" and then "automatic adjustment of gamma  
correction".  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 62  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Blurred image  
Cause/Defect area  
Scanner bedewing  
Drum  
Step  
1
Check items  
Scanner bedewed?  
Drum bedewed or dirty?  
Measures  
Clean it.  
2
Wipe drum with dry cloth.  
* Be sure never to use alcohol or other organic sol-  
vents because they have bad effect on drum.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 63  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(8) Poor fusing  
Cause/Defect area  
Step  
1
Check items  
Contact defect at terminal point?  
Fuser lamp open-circuited?  
Pressure springs working properly?  
Fuser roller temperature too low?  
Paper dump?  
Measures  
Fuser lamp unlighted  
Correct it.  
Replace it.  
2
Fuser roller pressure defect  
Thermistor, LGC board  
Paper  
3
Check/adjust pressure springs.  
Check/correct related circuit.  
Change paper.  
4
5
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 64  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(9) Blank copy  
Cause/Defect area  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller/  
High-voltage transformer output defective? Adjust output and correct circuit, or replace defec-  
tive transformer.  
developer bias)  
Process unit (EPU)/  
developer unit set position  
Developer drive system  
Developer material  
2
Process unit (EPU) or developer unit in- Check/correct developer sleeve coupling engaging.  
stallation defective?  
Check EPU sliding mechanism.  
3
4
Developer sleeve and mixer rotate?  
Check/correct developer drive system.  
Developer material properly transported? Remove foreign matter from developer material, if  
any.  
Developer pole position  
Doctor blade position  
Drum  
5
6
7
Magnetic brush phase error?  
Doctor sleeve gap incorrect?  
Drum rotating?  
Adjust developer pole position.  
Adjust gap with doctor-sleeve jig.  
Check that drum shaft is inserted.  
Check drum drive system.  
Harness for SCM, SIC, IMC  
and LGC boards  
8
Connectors securely connected?  
Re-connect connectors securely.  
Any open-circuited harness between Replace harness.  
boards?  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 65  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(10) Solid copy  
Cause/Defect area  
Exposure lamp  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Check lamp terminal contact.  
Check circuit and replace thermostat if it is not alive.  
Replace defective lamp regulator if any.  
Remove it.  
Does exposure lamp light?  
Lamp regulator  
Scanner  
2
3
Foreign matter in optical path?  
Scanner or drum bedewed?  
Bedewing of scanner and  
drum  
Clean mirrors, lens and drum.  
Keep power cord plugged so that damp heater can  
work.  
Main charger  
4
5
6
Main charger securely installed?  
Main charger wire open-circuited?  
Re-install it securely.  
Replace it.  
High-voltage transformer  
(Main charger)  
High-voltage transformer output defective? Adjust output and correct circuit, or replace high-  
voltage transformer.  
Harness for SCM, SIC, IMC  
and LGC boards  
7
Connectors securely connected?  
Re-connect connectors securely.  
Any open-circuited harness between Replace harness.  
boards?  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 66  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(11) White banding (in feeding direction)  
Cause/Defect area  
Laser optical unit  
Main charger grid  
Developer unit  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Foreign matter or dust on slit glass?  
Foreign matter on charger grid?  
Foreign matter in developer unit?  
Foreign matter on drum seal?  
Clean slit glass.  
2
Remove foreign matter.  
Remove foreign matter.  
Remove foreign matter.  
3
4
5
Drum seal of developer unit in proper con- Modify position of drum seal or replace it.  
tact with drum?  
Drum  
6
7
Any abnormalities on drum surface?  
Replace drum.  
Transport path  
Does toner image touch foreign matter af- Remove foreign matter.  
ter transfer, before entering fuser unit?  
Discharge LED array  
Scanner  
8
9
Any lamp of discharge LED array gone out? Replace discharge LED array.  
Foreign matter or dust in optical path?  
Clean lens and mirrors.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 67  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(12) White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Cause/Defect area  
Main charger  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Remove foreign matter.  
Foreign matter on charger?  
2
Terminal contact defective?  
Clean or adjust terminals.  
Drum  
3
Any abnormalities on drum surface?  
Discharge LED array lighting properly?  
Replace drum.  
Discharge LED array  
Developer unit  
4
Replace discharge LED array or clean terminals.  
5
Developer sleeve rotation defective? Any Check developer drive system, or clean sleeve sur-  
abnormalities on sleeve surface?  
Drum or scanner jittery?  
face.  
Drive system  
6
7
Check each drive system.  
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger and transfer  
roller)  
High-voltage transformer output defective? Check/correct related circuits.  
If high-voltage transformer is defective, replace it.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 68  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(13) Skew (slantwise copying)  
Cause/Defect area  
Cassette  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is cassette or LCF properly installed?  
Re-install cassette or LCF properly.  
LCF  
2
Too much paper loaded in cassette or LCF? Reduce paper to 600 sheets or less.  
(1500 sheets or less for LCF)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper corner folded?  
Change paper direction and reinsert.  
Cassette or LCF side guides properly set? Adjust side guides.  
Paper feed roller  
Rollers  
Is surface of paper feed roller dirty?  
Defective mounting of roller to shaft?  
Registration roller spring out of place?  
Pre-registration guide improperly  
mounted?  
Clean roller surface with alcohol, or replace roller.  
Check and fasten E-rings, pins, clips and setscrews.  
Mount spring correctly. Clean roller if it is dirty.  
Correct it.  
Registration roller  
Pre-registration guide  
Original scale  
9
Original scale slanted?  
Adjust it.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 69  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(14) Color banding (in feeding direction)  
Cause/Defect area  
Scanner  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Clean slit, lens and mirrors.  
Foreign matter in optical path?  
Foreign matter on grid?  
Main charger grid  
2
Remove foreign matter.  
3
Grid dirty or deformed?  
Clean or replace grid.  
Main charger  
4
Foreign matter on main charger?  
Charger wire dirty or deformed?  
Foreign matter inside charger case?  
Inner surface of charger case dirty?  
Paper dust on cleaning blade edge?  
Remove foreign matter.  
5
Clean or replace charger wire.  
Remove foreign matter.  
6
7
Clean inside.  
Cleaner  
8
Clean or replace paper dust removal brush for reg-  
istration roller.  
Clean or replace cleaning blade.  
Readjust cleaning blade contact.  
Clean toner recovery auger section.  
9
Cleaning blade contact improper?  
10 Toner recovery defective?  
Fuser unit  
11 1. Dirt or scratches on fuser roller surface? 1. Clean or replace fuser roller.  
2. Thermistor cleaned at PM?  
12 Scratches on drum surface?  
13 Foreign matter or dust on slit glass?  
2. Clean thermistor.  
Drum  
Replace drum.  
Laser optical unit  
Shading correction plate  
Remove foreign matter or dust.  
14 Dust or stain on shading correction plate? Clean plate.  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 70  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(15) Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Cause/Defect area  
Main charger wire  
Fuser roller  
Step  
1
Check items  
Charger wire dirty or deformed?  
Fuser roller or oil roller dirty?  
Measures  
Clean or replace charger wire.  
Clean them.  
2
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger/  
transfer roller)  
3
High-voltage transformer output defective? Check circuit and replace high-voltage transformer  
if defective.  
Drum  
4
5
6
Deep scratch on drum surface?  
Replace drum if scratch has reached aluminum  
base.  
Fine scratches on drum surface (drum pit- Check and adjust contact of cleaning blade and re-  
ting)? covery blade.  
Scattered toner recovery  
roller of developer unit  
Electrical continuity secured between de- If not, replace developer bias supply spring.  
veloper bias supply spring and recovery  
roller?  
Scanner carriage section  
7
Foreign matter on carriage rail?  
Remove foreign matter.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 71  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(16) White spots  
Cause/Defect area  
Developer unit/  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Toner density of developer material proper? Check and correct auto-toner sensor and toner sup-  
Toner cartridge  
ply operation.  
Check whether amount of toner is sufficient in toner  
cartridge.  
Doctor-sleeve gap  
Main charger  
2
3
4
5
Doctor-sleeve gap proper?  
Foreign matter on charger?  
Charger wire dirty or deformed?  
Adjust gap.  
Remove it.  
Clean or replace charger wire.  
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger/ developer  
bias/transfer roller)  
High-voltage transformer output defective? Adjust output.  
Developer material  
6
Accumulated copy volume for replacement Replace developer material.  
attained?  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 72  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(17) Poor image transfer  
Cause/Defect area  
Transfer belt  
Step  
Check items  
Transfer belt dirty?  
Measures  
1
2
Clean it.  
Transfer belt in defective contact with Adjust contact.  
drum?  
3
4
5
6
Any deformation or abnormalities on trans- Replace belt.  
fer belt?  
Paper  
Paper in cassette or LCF curled?  
Paper in cassette or LCF damp?  
Registration roller malfunctioning?  
Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change pa-  
per.  
Change paper.  
* Avoid storing paper in damp place.  
Clean roller, re-mount spring, or replace defective  
clutch-related parts.  
Registration roller  
Readjust roller speed.  
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller)  
7
High-voltage transformer output defective? Check circuit and adjust transformer output.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 73  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(18) Uneven image density  
Cause/Defect area  
Main charger  
Step  
1
Check items  
Main charger dirty?  
Transfer belt dirty?  
Measures  
Clean it or replace charger wire.  
Clean belt.  
Transfer belt  
2
3
Transfer belt in defective contact with Adjust belt.  
drum?  
4
5
6
7
8
Any abnormalities or deformation on belt? Replace belt.  
Laser optical unit  
Foreign matter or dust on slit glass?  
Discharge LED array dirty?  
Clean slit glass.  
Clean it.  
Discharge LED array  
Any lamp of discharge LED array gone out? Replace it.  
Magnetic brush in defective contact with Adjust doctor-sleeve gap.  
drum?  
Developer unit  
9
Developer unit pressure mechanism mal- Check mechanism.  
functioning?  
10 Defective transport of developer material? Remove foreign matter if any.  
Scanner section  
11 1. Platen cover open?  
1. Close platen cover.  
2. Clean them.  
2. Glass, mirrors, or lens filter dirty?  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 74  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(19) Faded image (low density, color reproduction defect, gray balance defect)  
Cause/Defect area  
Toner empty  
Step  
1
Check items  
“ADD TONER” symbol flashing?  
Enough toner in cartridge?  
Toner density in developer material too  
low?  
Measures  
Replace toner cartridge.  
Auto-toner circuit  
2
Check auto-toner circuit function.  
3
Toner motor  
4
5
6
7
Toner motor malfunctioning?  
Any abnormalities in toner cartridge?  
Developer material life ended?  
Check motor drive circuit.  
Replace toner cartridge.  
Replace developer material.  
Toner cartridge  
Developer material  
Developer unit  
Magnetic brush in proper contact with Check developer unit installation.  
drum?  
Adjust doctor-sleeve gap and pole position.  
Clean it or replace charger wire.  
Clean or replace drum.  
Main charger  
8
9
Main charger dirty?  
Film formed on drum surface?  
Drum  
High-voltage transformer  
10 High-voltage transformer settings im- Adjust high-voltage transformer output.  
proper?  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 75  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(20) Image dislocation in feeding direction  
Cause/Defect area  
Scanner/printer adjustment  
defect  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Same dislocation on every copy?  
Adjust scanner/printer using adjustment mode.  
Registration roller  
2
3
4
5
Registration roller dirty, or spring out of Clean roller with alcohol.  
place?  
Re-install spring.  
Registration motor malfunctioning?  
Adjust or replace gears, etc. if they are not engaged  
properly.  
Paper feed motor  
Paper feed motor malfunctioning?  
Check circuit or motor and replace them if neces-  
sary.  
Pre-registration guide  
Pre-registration guide mounted defec- Re-install guide.  
tively?  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 76  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(21) Image jittering  
Cause/Defect area  
Step  
0
Check items  
Measures  
If proper, perform step 1 to 3;otherwise perform step  
4 and after.  
Toner image proper on drum?  
Registration roller  
Transfer belt  
1
2
Registration roller rotation defective?  
Transfer belt malfunctioning?  
Check registration roller section and its springs.  
Check drive system and replace transfer belt if nec-  
essary.  
Fuser roller  
3
Fuser roller rotation defective?  
Check fuser roller drive system.  
Replace rollers if necessary.  
Replace drum.  
Drum  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Large scratch on drum?  
Carriage operation  
Slider sheet defective?  
Replace it.  
Any abnormalities on carriage feet?  
Tension of timing belt inappropriate?  
Carriage drive system malfunctioning?  
Mirror loosely mounted?  
Replace feet.  
Adjust tension.  
Check carriage drive system.  
Fix it properly.  
Scanner  
Drum drive system  
10 Drum drive system malfunctioning?  
Check drum drive system.  
Clean or replace belt, pulley, bushing if they have  
dirt or scratches.  
EPU load  
11 EPU load too high?  
Check EPU.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 77  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(22) Poor cleaning  
Cause/Defect area  
Developer material  
Cleaning roller/  
Oil roller  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Specified developer material not used?  
Use specified developer material and toner.  
2
Cleaning roller or oil roller damaged or their Replace defective rollers.  
life ended?  
Fuser roller  
3
Bubbles on fuser roller (188.5 mm pitch on Replace fuser roller. Check and modify heater con-  
copy)?  
trol circuit.  
4
5
6
7
8
Fuser roller life ended?  
Replace it.  
Fuser roller pressure improper?  
Fuser roller temperature abnormal?  
Paper dust on cleaning blade edge?  
Cleaning blade peeled?  
Check and adjust pressure mechanism.  
Check and correct circuit.  
Clean it.  
Cleaning blade  
Replace blade.  
Check and replace drum.  
Clean toner recovery auger.  
Check cleaning blade pressure.  
Toner recovery auger  
9
Toner recovery defective?  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 78  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(23) Uneven light distribution  
Cause/Defect area  
Original glass  
Step  
1
Check items  
Original glass dirty?  
Measures  
Clean glass.  
Main charger wire  
Discharge LED array  
Scanner  
2
Main charger wire dirty?  
Clean or replace wire.  
Clean it.  
3
Discharge LED array dirty?  
4
Reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, lens, etc. Clean them.  
dirty?  
Exposure lamp  
5
6
Exposure lamp tilted?  
Adjust lamp mounting.  
Replace it.  
Lamp discolored or degraded?  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 79  
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(24) Blotched image  
Cause/Defect area  
Paper  
Step  
1
Check items  
Too thin paper used?  
Paper too dry?  
Measures  
Change paper.  
Change paper.  
2
Transfer belt  
3
Transfer belt in proper contact with drum? Correct/adjust belt.  
Any abnormalities on belt? Clean or replace belt.  
High-voltage transformer output abnormal? Adjust output. Replace transformer, if necessary.  
4
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller)  
5
FC-22 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 80  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5.1 [ 3 ][ 9 ] Mode Operation  
5.1.1 Outline  
Connect copier and PC with serial cable and turn the power on pressing 3 and 9 keys, the copier goes  
into "Firmware Version Up Mode".Then you can update system software data and/or UI data through the  
PC.  
5.1.2 Preparation of PC  
To update the firmware of copier, the following preparations are necessary.  
(1) Software Installation  
"Virtual modem" and "War FTP Daemon" have to be installed in your PC.  
Please refer to "5.2 Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC"  
And also, War FTP Daemon has to be "ONLINE" mode.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 1  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Preparation of updated files.  
New files for update are stored in the following folder of the PC.  
And also, the files must be named as follows  
C: \WEBSHARE\FTPROOT  
New files for update :  
Kind of data  
File name  
sysfirm.tz  
uidataF.tz  
uidata0.tz  
uidata1.tz  
uidata2.tz  
uidata3.tz  
- Program data  
- Fixed UI data  
- Common UI data  
- 1st language UI data  
- 2nd language UI data  
- 3rd language UI data  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 2  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Connection between copier and PC  
Connect MMF(FSMS) port of the copier and serial communication port of PC specified by the setup  
of virtual modem using a crossing cable.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 3  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.3 Firmware update operation  
1. Turn ON the power of copier on pressing 3 and 9 keys.  
2. The following messages are displayed on copier control panel.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
> Make a connection from PC.  
3. Serial connection is made by dial-up from PC.  
Refer to "5.2 Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC" about procedures for dial-  
up network connection.  
Key in "#39" for "Phone number".  
Default Location  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 4  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The following screens will be displayed if it succeeds in serial connection.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
> Press START key to install new  
firmwares.  
Target area number  
> Please select a target with DIGI-  
TAL keys.  
Press [HELP], and you can confirm the version number of firmware and UI data, before updating to  
new one. (To return to previous screen, press [HELP] again.)  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
target  
version code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
005.101  
004.001  
005.002  
006.001  
006.001  
006.003  
SEU  
0
One of the followings:  
SJP, SEU, SUC, SX  
0
3
7
11  
The number of "target" provides with following information.  
1 : Program data  
2 : Fixed UI data  
3 : Common UI data  
4 : 1st language UI data  
5 : 2nd language UI data  
6 : 3rd language UI data  
"version" is displayed like "XXX.YYY".  
"XXX" is major version and "YYY" is minor version.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 5  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
"Code" provides with following information.  
A. In the case of Program data("target" is 1), "code" means the destination.  
SUC: for USA and Canada  
SEU: for European countries  
SX:  
for Australia and Asian countries  
SJP: for Japan  
B. In the case of UI data("target" is 2-6), "code" means Language.  
Code  
2
Language  
Japanese  
Code  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Language  
Finnish  
3
American English  
English  
Norwegian  
Australian English  
Polish  
4
5
reserved  
French  
6
Czech  
7
German  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Greek  
8
Romanian  
Bulgarian  
Portuguese  
Hungarian  
reserved  
9
10  
11  
12  
Italian  
Spanish  
Danish  
5. Select the area for update using ten keys.  
Using [1] to [6] keys and [INTERRUPT] key, you can select a target area.  
A selected number is displayed at target area. Press [INTERRUPT] to input "#".  
The relation between target area number and firmware data is as follows.  
1 : Program data  
2 : Fixed UI data  
3 : Common UI data  
4 : 1st language UI data  
5 : 2nd language UI data  
6 : 3rd language UI data  
#1 : All data (1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)  
#2 : All UI data (2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)  
#3 : All language UI data (4, 5 and 6)  
6.Press [START] key and copier starts to update the data.  
Do not turn OFF the power of the copier or the computer, or disconnect the connection  
between the copier and computer after pressing the START key.  
Interrupting the transmission of a file to the copier will result in corrupting the file in F-  
ROM of the copier. If this file is corrupted, you have to re-install the data again.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 6  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the case of 1 - 6 :  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Displaying current status as follows.  
– reading a file.  
Installing a new firmware.  
— reading a file.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
In the case of #1 - #3  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Installing a new firmware.  
— reading a file.  
Target Version  
l
installing  
Displaying current data area being loaded  
7. The following screen will be displayed after firmware data is updated.  
In the case of 1 - 6:  
If you want to update other area continuously, press [START] key and repeat the operation from  
step 5.  
After finished, turn OFF the power or press [CLEAR] key.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Updated data version number  
Firmware version up completed.  
Version: 001.003 code:SEU  
> Press START key to continue.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 7  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the case of #1 - #3:  
The following screen is displayed after finished.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: #1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Target  
version  
001.002  
002.001  
002.031  
003.022  
003.022  
003.033  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Updated data version numbers  
8. Press [CLEAR] key to cancel downloading on the way.  
However, it becomes unable to cancel after start of elimination process of flash ROM.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Program canceled.  
9. When failing in update, the following error message is displayed.  
(If an error occurs, "Recovery Mode" starts automatically when you turn ON the power next time. See  
10:Recovery mode)  
ERROR MESSAGE  
- file read error.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
- file information error.  
- unfit device.  
Target: 1  
- device erase error.  
- device write error.  
- verify error.  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
- cannot set NvRAM flags.  
– file read error.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 8  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Recovery mode  
When you turn ON the power after an error occurs, you'll see following display.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Recovery mode : target 4–6 failed.  
> make a connection from PC  
Connect with dial-up network (see procedure 3), and the display changes as follows.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: #3  
Recovery mode : target 4–6 failed.  
Established serial connection with PC.  
> Press START key to install new  
firmwares.  
Further procedure is the same as normal sequence.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 9  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.4 Screen details  
The following screen will be displayed in [ 3 ][ 9 ] mode.  
Power ON  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Cannot connect with PC.  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
> Make a connection from PC.  
Connection  
Failure  
Connected  
Target area number  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Change the number by pressing key  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
Target: 6  
Target: 1  
> Press START key to install new firm-  
wares.  
Press  
digital key  
> Please select a target with DIGITAL  
keys.  
Press CLEAR  
Key  
Press START  
Key  
Target: #1  
1’ 1  
2
2
Press CLEAR  
Key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Program canceled.  
Target: 1  
Power OFF  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 10  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the case of 1 - 6:  
1 Press Start Key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Installing a new firmware.  
– reading a file.  
Message will change as follows.  
– reading a file.  
– checking a read file.  
– checking the device.  
– setting NvRAM flags.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
– verifying the device.  
– cleaning NvRAM flags.  
Failed  
Press CLEAR  
Key  
Successful  
2
3
4
3
Successful  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Updated data version number  
Target: 1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Version: 001.003 code:SEU  
2
Press CLEAR  
Key  
> Press START key to continue.  
Press START Key  
Change the number by pressing key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Target: 1  
Target: 6  
> Press START key to install new  
firmwares.  
Press digital  
key  
> Please select a target with DIGI-  
TAL keys.  
Target: #1  
Press CLEAR  
Key  
Press START  
Key  
1
1’  
2
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 11  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the case of #1- #3:  
1’  
Press Start Key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Installing a new firmware.  
– reading a file.  
Message will change as follows.  
– reading a file.  
Target Version  
– checking a read file.  
– checking the device.  
– setting NvRAM flags.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
– verifying the device.  
– cleaning NvRAM flags.  
l
installing  
Failed  
Press CLEAR  
Key  
Successful  
4’  
3’  
2’  
3’  
Displaying current data  
area being loaded.  
Successful  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Updated data version numbers  
Target: 1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Press CLEAR Key  
2’  
Target  
version  
001.002  
1
2
3
4
5
6
002.001  
002.031  
003.022  
003.022  
003.033  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Program canceled.  
Target: #1  
Target  
version  
001.002  
Canceled Area  
1
2
canceled.  
Power OFF  
Power OFF  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 12  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the case of 1 - 6:  
4 Failed  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
– file read error.  
ERROR MESSAGE  
– file read error.  
– file information error.  
– unfit device.  
– device erase error.  
– device write error.  
– verify error.  
– cannot set NvRAM flags.  
Power OFF  
In the case of #1 - #3:  
Failed  
4’  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
– file read error.  
ERROR MESSAGE  
Target Version  
– file read error.  
– file information error.  
– unfit device.  
1
2
001.002  
error  
– device erase error.  
– device write error.  
– verify error.  
– cannot set NvRAM  
flags.  
Error  
occurrence  
area  
Power OFF  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 13  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC  
5.2.1 Outline  
The following instructions show how to update system firmwares using your PC and FTP(File Transfer  
Protocol).  
5.2.2 System configuration  
System  
board  
PC  
Serial Cable  
Software Requirements for PC.  
– Microsoft Windows95.  
– Virtual Modem.  
– The official name is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. –  
– FTP Server tools. (Ex. War FTP Daemon)  
Serial Cable.  
– PC and System board are connected with the following cross line cable.  
DTE-DTE connections (D-SUB 9 PIN/RS-232C)  
1 CD  
1 CD  
2 RXD  
3 TXD  
4 DTR  
5 GND  
6 DSR  
7 RTS  
8 CTS  
9 CI  
2 RXD  
3 TXD  
4 DTR  
5 GND  
6 DSR  
7 RTS  
8 CTS  
9 CI  
Protocol specifications between PC and system board.  
SPEED  
115200bps  
8 BITS  
NONE  
DATA BITS  
PARITY  
STOP BITS  
1 BIT  
FLOW CONTROL NONE  
ECHO  
OFF  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 14  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.3 Preparation of PC to use a network  
(1) Setting Virtual Modem.  
The connection between PC and copier is made using PPP(Point-to-Point Protocol). It is necessary  
to use a dial-up networking, and use a virtual modem.  
First, install the virtual modem. The virtual modem can be downloaded from the following web site.  
~
URL: http://www.mindspring.com/ kewells/net/scripts.html  
After download, set up the modem as follows.  
Click "Start" button, point at "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".  
Click on Modems.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 15  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click "Add" Button, and open "Install New Modem" wizard.  
And then, check "Don't detect my modem; I will select it from a list", and click "Next" button.  
Click "Have Disk" button, and then select a folder download file is stored in.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 16  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select "Direct Connection", and then click "Next" button.  
Select "Communications Port(COM1)",and then click "Next" button.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 17  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click "Finish" button, then Virtual Modem installation is completed.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 18  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Using Dial-Up Networking.  
Note: Your computer may be already set up to use a network. If Windows prompts you for a network  
password at startup and if Network Neighborhood icon appears on Windows desktop, your network  
is already set up. In this case, you can skip this section.  
In Network dialog box, click "Configuration" tab.  
Confirm that "Dial-Up Adapter" and "TCP/IP" are displayed.  
If your PC does not have "Dial-Up Adapter", then click "Add" button.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 19  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select "Microsoft" in Manufactures list box, and select "Dial-Up Adapter" in Network Adapters list  
box, and then click "OK" button.  
When you click "OK" button, Windows automatically set up the TCP/IP Protocol components with  
Dial-Up Adapter.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 20  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Using New Connection.  
Double-click "My Computer". If "Dial-Up Networking" icon is not in the window, click "Add/Remove  
Programs" in Control Panel.  
Otherwise, skip to the next step to create a connection.  
Double-click "Dial-Up Networking".  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 21  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type something in "Type a name for the computer you are dialing".  
Select "Direct Connection" for "Select a device", and click "Configure" button.  
Click "General" tab in "Direct Connection Properties" box, select 115200 for "Maximum speed",  
check "Only connect at this speed".  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 22  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click "Connection" tab, confirm that all check boxes in "Call preferences" are not selected, and click  
"Advanced" button.  
Confirm that all check boxes in "Advanced Connection Settings" dialog box is not selected, click  
"OK" button, and then return to "Make New Connection" dialog box.  
After returning to "Make New Connection" dialog box, click "Next" button.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 23  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type #39 for "Telephone number".  
To change "Country code", click the arrow next to the country, and select a country you want. After  
that, click "Next" button.  
Click "Finish" button, then "Make New Connection" is completed.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 24  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.4 Installation of FTP server  
First, it is necessary to install Free Software "War FTP Daemon Version 1.65" as an FTP server.  
War FTP Daemon can be downloaded from the following web site.  
URL: http://www.jgaa.com/downloadpage.htm  
Download the file "ward165.exe" from the above site, and execute it. Some files are created, and then  
execute "Setup.exe".  
Create the C: WEBSHARE FTPROOT folder.  
After that, execute "war-ftpd.exe" in "war-ftpd" folder.  
Select [Properties]-[Security]-[Edit User]  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 25  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click "Add" button, and key in dppc for "New name".  
Key in dppc for "New Password" and "Verify Password", and click "OK" button.  
Select "dppc" and click "File Access". Click "Add" button.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 26  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Double-click "Webshare".  
Double-click "Ftproot" and click "OK" button.  
Change "Read", "Write", "Delete", "Execute", "List", "Create" and "Remove" from Gray Check to Black  
Check.  
Check "Root", "Home" and "Recursive" in "Special" box as follows.  
And then, click "Apply" and "OK".  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 27  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make the connection "ONLINE" mode, click the button  
before firmware updating.  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
5 - 28  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 29  
FC-22 FIRMWARE UPDATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
6.1 AC Wire Harness  
J614-6  
J614-7  
100V  
WHITE  
WHITE  
J701-1  
J701-3  
MAIN-SW  
F-DOOR-SW  
WHITE  
L-DOOR-SW  
WHITE  
J614-5  
J614-1  
INLET  
WHITE  
N
L
F
E
WHITE  
BLACK  
WHITE  
WHITE  
1
2
3
4
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 15A  
BLUE  
J614-8  
BLACK  
BROWN  
GREEN  
J615-2  
J318-2  
BLUE  
J616-2  
J321-5  
BLUE  
J321-4  
J311-4  
C
A
SSR-L  
B
115V or 127V  
LRG  
SSR-U  
D
DHTR-  
U2  
DHTR-  
L2  
J601-12  
RED  
J603  
J601-1  
RED  
J602  
SW-PWR  
INLET  
WHITE  
N
L
WHITE  
BLACK  
DHTR-  
U1  
DHTR-  
L1  
3
4
1
2
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 20A  
BLACK  
BROWN  
GREEN  
HTR-U  
J281  
HTR-L  
Thermostat  
Fuse  
Thermostat  
Fuse  
J291  
A
A
A
A
200V series  
Upper  
thermostat  
Lower  
thermostat  
TBU  
SCN  
J261  
BLACK  
J601-24  
BLACK  
J601-13  
J321-1  
J311-3  
J321-2  
INLET  
WHITE  
N
L
WHITE  
BLACK  
1
2
3
4
BROWN  
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 10A  
J615-1  
J318-1  
BROWN  
BLACK  
BROWN  
GREEN  
L-DOOR-SW  
J614-3  
BLACK  
BLACK  
J701-6  
J701-4  
BLACK  
F-DOOR-SW  
BLACK  
J614-2  
BROWN  
MAIN-SW  
BLACK  
J614-4  
FC-22 WIREHARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 6 - 1  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
January 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 2 FC-22 WIREHARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FC-22 SERVICE HANDBOOK  
6.WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
6.2 DC Wire Harness  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FC-22 WIREHARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 6 - 3  
January 20000 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tiger Games 42792 User Manual
Toastmaster Waffle Iron TMWB4BELW User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD 480EKE User Manual
Toshiba DVR 8GHO44 88 User Manual
Toshiba Printer B 450 QQ Series User Manual
Toshiba TV DVD Combo MD14FP1 User Manual
Trimble Outdoors GPS Receiver 5700 5800 User Manual
Uniden Portable Radio uh078sx User Manual
Vizio Flat Panel Television E390IA1 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Hot Beverage Maker ML 103414 User Manual